JP2016039908A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent discomfort from being giving to a player around a game machine that stops working during a specific performance.SOLUTION: A variable performance can be executed even during execution of a special performance to be executed when a predetermined start period arrives, and sound relating to the special performance is outputted with a set volume during execution of the special performance. When the variable performance is not started for predetermined time after completion of the variable performance during execution of the special performance, sound relating to the special performance is outputted with volume reduced from the set volume, and sound relating to the special performance is outputted with the set volume according to start of the variable performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 43

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Examples of general gaming machines include pachinko gaming machines, rotary gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, and jiyan ball gaming machines. In this type of gaming machine, there is one that performs time measurement by an RTC (real time clock) and performs a specific effect in the specific effect mode when the specified time information is obtained (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a musical performance performance is performed as a specific performance, and this musical performance performance is performed based on the dance video data and sound data of the character, and also during the musical performance performance. Was supposed to be done.

JP 2014-121391 A

  However, in a gaming machine that performs a specific effect, such as the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in an operating state in which a game is being played by a player, the specific effect is generated by an image and sound of a predetermined volume. Although the game can be excited by the player, on the other hand, even in the non-operating state where the player is not playing the game, the effect is produced by the image and the sound of the predetermined volume as in the operating state. As a result, some players around non-operating gaming machines feel uncomfortable with the specific performance being performed despite being non-operating. .

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player around a gaming machine that has become non-operating during a specific presentation from causing discomfort in a gaming machine that performs a specific presentation. It is.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs a variable display according to the establishment of the start condition, and in a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player in response to the special display result being derived as a result of the variable display. And an effect control means for executing a game effect including at least a special effect that is executed when a predetermined start time is reached, and the effect control means varies even during execution of the special effect. The sound control means can output the sound related to each of the game effects at a set volume, and the sound control means sets the sound related to the special effect during the execution of the special effect. The first sound control that is output at the time is executed, and when the variation effect is not started for a predetermined time after the variation effect is finished during the execution of the special effect, the sound related to the special effect is reduced from the set volume. volume Run the second sound control outputs, the in response to the variation effect is started during execution of the second sound control, executing the first sound control, characterized in that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent discomfort from being given to players around a gaming machine that has become non-operating during a specific performance.

Schematic front view of pachinko machine 1 Enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. Schematic perspective view showing the internal structure of the specific region 9 Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and gaming state Schematic diagram of a gaming system in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed The figure which shows the production structure in normal production mode and special production mode The screen figure which shows a mode that the special effect image currently displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is reduced-displayed on specific conditions. The screen figure which shows a mode that the special effect image currently displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is reduced-displayed on specific conditions. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the music performance direction performed with the pachinko machine 1 Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of music performance production performed in the pachinko machine 1 after all new songs are performed The block diagram which shows the structural example of the control apparatus with which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The block diagram which shows the structural example of the image sound control board 140 The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the game control board 100 Detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S23 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S307 in FIG. Detailed flowchart of the stop process in step S319 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of normal symbol processing in step S4 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of electric tulip process in step S5 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the specific area release control process in step S6 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the specific area release control process in step S6 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the big prize opening control process in step S7 of FIG. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the production during the special game Detailed flowchart of long hit game control processing in step S72 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the short hit game control process in step S76 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the game state setting process in step S745 of FIG. 27 and step S780 of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the production control board 130 Detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of volume initial value setting processing in step S11 of FIG. Block diagram showing a configuration example of the control ROM 144 The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the image sound control board 140 36 is a detailed flowchart of the measurement process in step S2100 of FIG. Explanatory diagram for explaining the performance management table 36 is a detailed flowchart of the state control process in step S2200 of FIG. Explanatory drawing for explaining the musical performance performance permission state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a music performance order management table 36 is a detailed flowchart of the volume setting process in step S2250 of FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart of the volume setting process in step S2250 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the effect control process before and after the performance start in step S2300 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of performance control process before performance start in step S2400 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of performance control process before performance start in step S2400 of FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart of the music performance production start process in step S2500 of FIG. Explanatory drawing for explaining the flow of the production when the production start time before the performance starts when the production of variation accompanying special symbol variation display is not performed Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display image at the time of shifting to the jackpot game state in the normal performance mode Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display image at the time of shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the special effect mode Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Schematic diagram of the default table Schematic of new song A main table Schematic of new song B main table Schematic diagram of new song C main table Schematic diagram of new song D main table Schematic diagram of new song E main table Schematic diagram of new song L main table Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of the image data used for drawing of a background image Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of the appearance rate of various background images 36 is a detailed flowchart of the music performance effect end process in step S2700 of FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step S2800 of FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart of the audio output control process in step S2900 of FIG.

  Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Example of schematic configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 / type 2 mixed type. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a game board 2 provided with an accessory related to winning or determination, and a frame member 3 surrounding the game board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval. The glass board and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which a game ball can flow down. Has been.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is connected to a card lending unit (not shown) that is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and inserts a card owned by the player (a so-called prepaid card or a membership card) into the card lending unit. By operating a lending button (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a lending request signal corresponding to the operation is transmitted from the card lending unit to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the pachinko gaming machine that has received this lending request signal 1, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the tray 28 by a payout control board, which will be described later, and the player starts a game using the paid out game balls.
The pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a card return promotion display for urging the player to return the card when the jackpot game ends. The purpose of this card return promotion display is to prevent card theft and forgetting to return, and when the jackpot game ends, the card return promotion display is performed when the game continues after the jackpot game ends, This is because the player has acquired a large amount of game balls through the jackpot game, so that it is not necessary to play a game using a card.

  When the player grasps the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 in the clockwise direction, the game balls stored in the tray 28 are guided to the launching device (not shown), and the game is performed with the hitting force according to the rotation angle of the handle 20. Fired into region 10. This game area 10 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the launched game balls are guided to the upper position in the game area 10 and contacted with the game nails, windmills, etc. It falls along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction. Note that the game ball is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 22.

  In addition, when the player operates the take-out button 23 that is disposed close to the tray 28, a part of the lower surface of the tray 28 is opened, and the game balls accumulated on the tray 28 are disposed below the tray 28 (not shown). Fall into the box. The dish 28 may be constituted by two dishes, an upper dish for storing game balls and prize balls supplied to the launching device, and a lower dish for collecting prize balls.

  When the player performs a so-called “left strike” in which the handle 20 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 10 as exemplified by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called “right strike” in which the handle 20 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right region in the game region 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

  A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two normal winning ports 14, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passing path of the left-handed game ball as a winning and determining role. In addition, in the passing path of the right-handed game ball, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, the two normal winning ports 14, the gate 16, the electric tulip 17, and the specified character are used as the winning and determination-related items. A winning opening 19 and a blade member 90 are provided.

  The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the big winning port 13, and the normal winning port 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. And win. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning location are paid out to the tray 28. The game balls that have not won a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

  The first start opening 11 as the first winning area is a start opening that is always open, and the second start opening 12 as the second winning area is operated by the electric tulip 17 as an ordinary electric accessory. It is a starting port that is opened only when In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins a prize through the first start port 11, or when a game ball wins a prize through the second start port 12, a special game advantageous to the player is executed? It is determined whether or not, and the determination result is displayed on the display 4 described later.

  In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the first start port 11 is referred to as “first special symbol determination”, and the game ball wins on the second start port 12 is a condition. The determination to be executed is referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination”.

  The special winning opening 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the big prize opening 13 is provided at the opening of the big prize opening 13. The special winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot is stopped and displayed on the display 4, that is, when one kind of jackpot has occurred, the plate is operated to win a big prize opening. A special game of opening 13 is executed. For this reason, the player can obtain more prize balls by making a right strike during the special game (during the big hit game) compared to when the special game is not being performed. When a predetermined small winning symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small bonus is stopped and displayed on the display 4, a small member that activates the blade member 90 described later to open the specific winning opening 19 is displayed. A winning game is executed. During the small hit game, the V winning opening 92 (see FIG. 3) is temporarily opened, and a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during this time, thereby generating two types of big wins. The big winning opening 13 is also opened when two types of jackpots are generated.

  The electric tulip 17 is disposed close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 is configured to change its posture between a closed posture (see FIG. 1) in which the pair of blade members closes the second starting port 12 and an open posture (not shown) in which the second starting port 12 is opened. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the second start port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, it is determined whether or not the second start port 12 is to be opened, although no prize ball is paid out. Here, when it is determined that the second start port 12 is to be opened, the operation of returning to the closed posture after the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 has maintained the open posture for the specified time is performed a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second starting port 12 is in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to win when the electric tulip 17 is not operated, whereas the game ball is easily won by operating the electric tulip 17. Become. In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the gate 16 is referred to as “ordinary symbol determination”.

  The normal winning opening 14 is always open like the first start opening 11 and is a winning opening through which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. Unlike the first starting port 11 and the like, even if a game ball wins the normal winning port 14, no determination is made.

Further, the game area 10 is provided with a main liquid crystal display device 5 and a sub liquid crystal display device 6 which are image display devices for displaying various effect images.
Illumination devices 7 are provided on the left and right of the sub liquid crystal display device 6, and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 and the illumination device 7 are integrally configured, and a lower movable device that moves upward to the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 5. It is also 8b.
An upper movable device 8 a is provided above the main liquid crystal display device 5, and the upper movable device 8 a is configured to move downward to the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  On the back side of the game board 2, there are a radio wave detection sensor (not shown) for detecting an electromagnetic wave having a predetermined electric field strength or higher in a predetermined band and a magnetic sensor (not shown) for detecting a magnetic force having a predetermined strength or higher. Is provided. The positions of these sensors are, for example, positions near various winning openings such as the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 13, the specific winning opening 19, and the center decoration provided on the game board surface. It is the back side of various kinds of objects such as movable objects.

  On the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 5 to be described later, a specific area 9 that is temporarily opened according to the result of the special symbol determination is provided. The specific area 9 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Configuration Example of Display 4]
FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination. As shown in FIG. 2, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, and the first special symbol are displayed. It has a symbol hold display 43, a normal symbol display 45, a normal symbol hold display 46, and a game state display 47.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the first special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. The first special symbol display 41 has a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit (1 type big hit), or a lost symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a loss. Is stopped.

  When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the second special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. The second special symbol display 42 has a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot (1 type jackpot), and a small hit indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot A losing symbol indicating that the symbol or the result of the second special symbol determination is losing is stopped and displayed.

  By the way, when a game ball is newly won at the first starting port 11 during the symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination or during the special game, the first special symbol determination and the symbol variation display are immediately triggered by this winning. Can not be executed. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment seems to hold the right of the first special symbol determination when the first special symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if a game ball wins the first starting port 11. It is configured. The first special symbol hold indicator 43 displays the number of hold of the first special symbol determination held in this way.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, even if a game ball wins at the second starting port 12, the second special symbol determination and the symbol variation display cannot be executed immediately, that is, during the symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination or If a new game ball is won at the second starting port 12 during the special game, the second special symbol determination is not executed, and the right of the second special symbol determination is not held. For this reason, the display device 4 is not provided with a display device that displays the number of reserved second symbol determinations.

  When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by suspending and displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol. Note that the normal symbol determination and the symbol variation display related to the normal symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even when the game ball passes through the gate 16, such as during the symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 45, the normal symbol is displayed. Judgment rights are withheld. The normal symbol hold display 46 displays the number of hold for normal symbol determination held in this way. The game state display 47 displays the game state at the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is called “special symbol”, and the symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 45 is “normal symbol”. Shall be called.

[Configuration Example of Specific Area 9]
FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the specific region 9. The vertical direction 34 and the width direction 35 in FIG. 3 correspond to the vertical direction 34 and the width direction 35 in FIG. The specific area 9 is an area where the game ball is opened so as to be able to enter when a small hit occurs, and a blade member 90 that opens and closes the specific prize opening 19 is provided in the specific prize opening 19 that is the entrance. Yes.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is “big hit” is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. And, the first special game is executed with one kind of big hit.

  In the present embodiment, as the first special game, two types of special games, a long winning game and a short winning game, are provided.

  The long winning game is a state in which the grand prize opening 13 is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, nine game balls are awarded to the big prize opening 13 or 29 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening 13 is opened). A long open round game in which the special winning opening 13 is closed after being maintained is executed a prescribed number of times. In the present embodiment, two types of long games for long-open round games, that is, 8R long games that are executed 4 times, and 7R long games that are executed 7 times long-open round games are played as long-games per 1 type big hit. A winning game is provided. In the long open round game, if the large winning opening 13 is long open so that a plurality of game balls can enter, the large winning opening 13 is opened and closed with an opening pattern different from the opening pattern exemplified in the present embodiment. You may do.

  The short win game is a short-opening round game in which the big prize opening 13 is closed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize opening 13 is opened and then the big prize opening 13 is closed. Is a 15R short game that executes a specified number of times (for example, 15 times). The prescribed number of times is not limited to 15 as long as it is plural. Further, in the short open round game, if the game ball is opened shortly so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter, the open game opening 13 is opened and closed with an open pattern different from the open pattern exemplified in the present embodiment. It may be.

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit” is stopped and displayed as the determination symbol on the second special symbol display 42, the blade member 90 is operated to operate the specific region 9. A small hit game that releases is executed. In this small hit game, the operation of the blade member 90 that closes the specific area 9 after maintaining the state in which the specific area 9 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 3.2 seconds) elapses after the specific area 9 is opened. It is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, once). In this way, when the small hit occurs, the game ball can enter the specific area 9.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the specific region 9 is provided with a guide member 91, a V winning opening 92, a lose winning opening 93, and a slide member 94. The guide member 91 guides the game ball that has entered the specific area 9 from the specific winning opening 19 to the V winning opening 92 or the lost winning opening 93. When a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 or the lose winning opening 93, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out. The lose prize opening 93 is always open, whereas the V prize opening 92 is normally closed by the slide member 94 and is opened only for a predetermined period after the specific prize opening 19 is opened. Specifically, in this embodiment, for example, 0.5 seconds after the specific winning opening 19 is opened, the slide member 94 slides to open the V winning opening 92, and 0.2 V from the opening of the V winning opening 92. When the second elapses, the slide member 94 returns to the original position shown in FIG. 3, and the V winning opening 92 is closed.

  Then, two kinds of big wins are generated when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 (V winning) during the opening period of the V winning opening 92, and the second special game including the already played small winning game is executed. The That is, when two types of big hits occur, the long hit game is executed following the small hit game. Specifically, following the small hit game in which the specific area 9 is opened for 3.2 seconds, the long win game consisting of seven long open round games in which the big winning opening 13 is opened long, or the big winning opening 13 is set. A long hit game consisting of 14 long open round games that are long open is executed. That is, a total of 8R special games including one small hit game and seven long open round games, or a total of 15R special games including one small hit game and 14 long open round games are executed. Is done.

  As described above, in the special game based on the 1st type jackpot, the first special game composed of the round game in which only the winning prize opening 13 is opened, whereas in the special game based on the 2nd type jackpot, the specific area 9 is opened. A second special game composed of a small hit game and a round game that opens the big prize opening 13 is executed. Note that if the game ball does not win the V winning opening 92 during the opening period of the V winning opening 92, the big winning opening 13 will not be opened following the small hit game, so the second special game is small. It will end with 1R of only winning games.

  In this embodiment, the case where the V winning opening 92 is opened and closed by the slide member 94 will be described. However, the V winning opening 92 is opened and closed by a blade member that rotates about the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an axial direction. It may be. In addition, the operation pattern of the blade member 90 during one small hit game (time and number of times of opening the specific winning opening 19) and the like can be appropriately changed.

[Description of changes in gaming state]
Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 4, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game is controlled in the “normal game state” or the “time-saving game state”.

  The “normal game state” is a normal game state in which a so-called electric chew support function is not given. Specifically, in the “normal game state”, when the second start port 12 is opened, the rate determined in the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low rate (for example, 1/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is set. A relatively long time (for example, 25 seconds) is set, and when it is determined that the second start port 12 is to be opened, the opening time of the second start port 12 is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second × 1). Game state set to (times).

  The “time saving gaming state” is a gaming state to which an electric chew support function is provided. Specifically, in the “short-time gaming state”, when the second start port 12 is opened, the rate determined in the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high rate (for example, 12/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is set. A relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds) is set, and when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the opening time of the second starting port 12 is relatively long (for example, 0.3 seconds × 5). Game state set to (times). In other words, the “short-time gaming state” is a gaming state in which the second start port 12 is more easily controlled to the open state than in the normal gaming state.

  Due to the board configuration of the game board 2, a game ball launched into the left area of the game area 10 can win the first starting port 11, whereas a game ball launched into the right area of the game area 10 There will never be a prize at the starting port 11. Further, the second start port 12 is unlikely to be in an open state in the “normal game state”. For this reason, there is no merit of making a right strike in the “normal game state”. In this way, the “normal game state” is a left-side advantageous state in which it is easier to hit a jackpot than hitting a game ball in the left area of the game area 10 than in the right area. 5 is left-handed according to the message displayed at 5 and the voice guidance output from the speaker 24.

  When the player makes a left strike in the “normal game state” and the game ball launched into the left area of the game area 10 wins the first start port 11, the first special symbol determination is performed and the first special symbol is determined. After the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 41, the determination symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol is determined to be one type of big win, the first special symbol display 41 is stopped and the big special symbol indicating that is stopped and the first special game that opens the special winning opening 13 is performed. Executed. The gaming state is set at the end of the first special game in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 at the start of the first special game. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 4, the “normal game state” is continued at a rate of 50% after the first special game is finished, while the remaining 50% is changed from “normal game state” to “ The gaming state changes to “short-time gaming state”.

  In the present embodiment, after the first special game is completed, the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 4, after the seven long open round games are performed as illustrated in FIG. There is a short per 7R when the normal gaming state is entered, and 50% of the one type large per 7R per short at this time. In addition, 15 times per 8R with a short time that will be in a short-time game state after four long open round games have been performed as per short time when the game will be controlled in the short-time game state after the end of the first special game. There are two types of short-acting short-term games that become short-time game states after the short-opening round game is completed, and 50% of the one-type game is one of these two types of short-timed games.

  When the gaming state shifts to the “time-saving gaming state”, the second start port 12 is more likely to be in the open state than in the “normal gaming state”. In addition, since most of the results of the second special symbol determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the second starting port 12 is a small hit, two types of big hits are likely to occur. As described above, the “short-time gaming state” is a right-side advantageous state in which a player hitting a game ball in the right region of the game area 10 is more likely to win a big hit than in a left-side region. 5 is performed in accordance with the message displayed on the screen 5 and the voice guidance output from the speaker 24.

  When the player makes a right strike in the “short-time gaming state” and the game ball launched into the right area of the game area 10 passes through the gate 16, normal symbol determination is performed. When it is determined that the second starting port 12 is opened when the normal symbol determination is performed in the “short-time gaming state”, the opening time of the second starting port 12 is longer than that in the “normal gaming state”. A game ball launched into the right area of the game area 10 easily wins the second starting port 12.

  In the “short time gaming state”, when the special symbol is not variably displayed and the game ball is won at the second starting port 12 when the special game is not being performed, the second special symbol determination is performed and the second special symbol display is performed. After the special symbol is variably displayed on the device 42, the determination symbol indicating the result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined that a small winning is determined by the second special symbol determination, the small special symbol indicating that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and the specific area 9 and the V winning opening 92 are temporarily displayed. The small hit game to be opened is executed, and the game ball is won in the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, so that two kinds of big hits are made, and the second special game including the small hit game is executed. Then, the game state is set at the end of the second special game according to the type of the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 at the time of the small hit game. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 4, the “short-time gaming state” is continued at a rate of 70% after the second special game is completed, while the remaining 30% is “from the short-time gaming state” to “ It will be returned to the “normal gaming state”.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, one small hit game and seven long open times, as illustrated in FIG. 4, as a short hit when the game will be controlled in the normal game state after the end of the second special game. There is provided per short 8R when the normal game state is reached after the round game is performed, and 30% per two kinds of big is per short 8R at this time. In addition, after the second special game, the game will be controlled in the short-time game state. As the short-time game, after one small hit game and 14 long open round games are performed, There are 2 types per 8R with a short time after a small hit game and 7 long open round games per short time, and 70% per 2 types Is one of these two types of time savings.

  In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, even when the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is performed 100 times in the “short-time gaming state”, the gaming state is not The “normal game state” is returned from the “short-time game state”.

[Configuration example of presentation means of pachinko gaming machine 1]
As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 has a main liquid crystal display device 5, a sub liquid crystal display device 6, an illuminating device 7, an upper movable device 8a, a speaker 24, etc. A frame lamp 25 is also provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 6 and the lighting device 7 constitute a lower movable device 8b. The upper movable device 8a and the lower movable device 8b function as a role for performing a jackpot finalizing effect and a role for performing a special effect in the special effect mode as described later.

  The main liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided at a position that is easily visible by a player. In the main liquid crystal display device 5, for example, various displays such as a decorative symbol for notifying the result of the special symbol determination, a character or item for performing a notice effect, a hold display image indicating that the first special symbol determination is held, etc. An effect image including the object is displayed.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 6 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided above the main liquid crystal display device 5. As the sub liquid crystal display device 6, one having a display screen smaller than that of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is used. The sub liquid crystal display device 6 is mainly used for a performance announcement effect for an effect performed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  In the present embodiment, a case where both the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 are configured by a liquid crystal display device will be described. However, both or one of them is another type such as an EL display device. You may comprise by an image display apparatus.

  The illuminating device 7 is configured to be movable with respect to the sub liquid crystal display device 6 and is accompanied by a countdown effect in the sub liquid crystal display device 6 for the purpose of guiding the player's line of sight to the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Displayed blinking.

  The speaker 24 produces a sound effect by outputting music, sound, sound effects, etc. so as to synchronize with the display effect performed in the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6. The frame lamp 25 produces an effect by light by changing a light emission color, a light emission pattern, and a light emission direction.

[Configuration example of operation means of the pachinko gaming machine 1]
The frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as operation means operated by the player. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information when pressed by the player. The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for instructing one of up, down, left and right directions. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is a case where an effect corresponding to the operation information input from the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is performed.
The effect button 26 and the effect key 27 are also used as an operation key for a menu screen described later and volume control.

[Main features of production performed on pachinko machine 1]
Hereinafter, the main features of effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a gaming system in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed. As illustrated in FIG. 5, in the so-called pachinko hall, one island is configured by arranging a plurality (for example, 20) of the above-described pachinko gaming machines 1 side by side. Each pachinko machine 1 installed on this island is electrically connected to the island power supply device 500 through a common island power supply line. Therefore, by turning on the power of the island power supply device 500 with the individual power switch of each pachinko gaming machine 1 set to “ON”, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on one island can be combined. Can be activated. As will be described in detail later, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment can start the same production at the same time in all the pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on the same island by using such an activation method. It has a configuration to do.

[Screen structure of normal production mode]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the effect mode related to the game, a normal effect mainly including a game-related effect such as a variable effect or a jackpot effect that is executed in association with a special symbol variable display is executed. In addition to the game-related effects, there is a special effect consisting of pre-start performances, music performance effects, and post-performance effects that are performed separately from the game-related effects at the production mode and a predetermined date and time. It consists of a special production mode that is the subject.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special performance executed during the special performance mode is
(1) Performance before the start of performances: Moderator, performance start standby, and countdown effects that are performed before the start of the performance of the performances (2) Performance of the performances of the singer group: Stage performance of the singer group (for example, 5 minutes)
(3) Production after the performance ends ... It consists of the next performance announcement performance and the DJ performance that are executed after the music performance performance ends.
As for the next performance announcement effect, a new song performance effect (new song) to be released next time will be announced until all songs are released, which will be described later. I do.

FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a production configuration in the normal production mode and the special production mode.
FIGS. 6A and 6H are diagrams showing an example of the effect configuration in the normal effect that is the normal effect mode, and FIGS. 6B to 6G are examples of the effect structure in various effects in the special effect mode. FIG.
A performance standby image P15, a countdown image P16, a music performance effect image P48, a next performance notification image P17, and a DJ image P26, which will be described later, are special effect images in the special effect mode.

FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of the effect configuration in the normal effect executed in the normal effect mode.
As shown in FIG. 6A, in the normal effect mode, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 in the game effect includes elements such as the background P11, the decorative symbol P12, the hold icon display P13, and the changing icon display P14. A game-related effect image composed of images is displayed. Then, using this game-related effect image, a variable effect is sequentially performed with a predetermined effect time based on the progress of the game based on the result of the lottery. In this fluctuating effect, a jackpot notice that is a notice that suggests that the expectation level of the jackpot is high, or a jackpot confirmation effect that indicates that the jackpot has been confirmed is executed.
It should be noted that, when the fluctuating effect according to FIG. 6A is being executed, various music, voice, and the like accompanying the game effect are output from the speaker 24.

  The background P11 is formed over the entire screen. The decorative symbol P12, the hold icon display P13, the changing icon display P14, and the like are displayed so as to overlap the background P11.

The decorative symbol P12 is composed of three symbols. For example, a single digit of “1” to “9” is variably displayed on each symbol. At the time of changing the decorative symbols, for example, the numerical value of each symbol is cyclically forwarded from top to bottom, and the display is scrolled on the display screen. And the numerical value of each symbol is fixed in the stop symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is presented by the combination of these numerical values. Usually, a stop symbol having three identical numbers is a symbol representing a hit.
Then, as shown in FIG. 6A, the decoration pattern P12 of the game effect displays decorations on the numbers or displays the face images of the members of the singer group on the numbers. In the illustrated example, numbers are displayed for each symbol, but various symbols such as characters, symbols, and marks other than numbers may be displayed.

The hold icon display P13 is composed of, for example, four marks. Each mark is increased or decreased according to the number of holdings. For example, one mark is displayed if the number of holds is one, and four marks are displayed if the number of holds is four.
And since the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a singer group, the hold icon display P13 of the game effect is configured by marks with a recording disk as a motif.

  The changing icon display P14 is an icon display that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot for the current changing effect, and when the display mode of the icon changes stepwise from the start to the end of the changing effect and when it does not change As the display mode changes up to a higher change level, the player's expectation for the jackpot is increased.

  Further, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 in the game effect, a notice effect image composed of elemental images such as a performance notice effect image P47 that counts down the time until the next music performance effect is started is displayed. . In the normal effect mode, the sub liquid crystal display device 6 displays a notice effect image associated with the change effect, an explanation image related to the singer group, and the like in addition to the notification effect image.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the performance announcement effect image P47 displays the name of the song to be performed next time (in the figure, “early winter memory”), and the song performance effect is started. The remaining time until (15 minutes 25 seconds in the example in the figure) is displayed.
By performing the performance notification effect using the performance notification effect image P47, it is possible to know in advance that a special effect different from the game proceeding according to the result of the lottery is performed for the player who is playing the game. it can. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which no game is performed, it can be expected that a player is invited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the performance announcement effect.
In addition, the remaining time display displayed in this performance notification effect corresponds to a first remaining time notification (countdown notification) for prompting the player to start the music performance effect.

FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an example of the effect configuration in the moderator effect which is a special effect executed in the special effect mode.
This moderator effect is an effect that is executed a predetermined time before the time when the music performance effect is started (2 minutes 5 seconds before in this figure). When the moderator effect is started, a chime sound is output from the speaker 24, and then an introduction voice for a music performance effect to be started is output from one member of the singer group.

  The various images displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 in this moderator effect are the same as those shown in FIG. Along with various musical pieces and voices accompanying this, a moderator voice and the like accompanying the moderator production are output.

FIG. 6C is a diagram showing an example of the effect configuration in the performance start standby effect that is a special effect executed in the special effect mode.
This performance start standby effect is an effect executed following the moderator effect. When the performance start standby effect is started, an image for a singer group appearing in the music performance effect to be started later, a video for performing a rehearsal, and the like are displayed.

In the performance start standby effect, a display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 displays a performance standby image P15 which is a video of a singer group preparing for a music performance effect to be started and a rehearsal scene.
Further, after the sub liquid crystal display device 6 has moved upward to the front side of the main liquid crystal display device, the display screen displays a decorative symbol P22 as a decorative symbol in the special effect mode and a hold icon as a hold icon display in the special effect mode. A game effect image in the special effect mode is displayed by an element image such as P23.
From the speaker 24, various kinds of music, voices, and the like accompanying the game effect are output, and voices during rehearsal accompanying the performance start standby effect are output.

  The decorative design P22 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 from the performance start standby effect to the next performance notification effect shown in FIG. 6 (F) described later is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. 6 (C). It is displayed in the central part of the device 5. The decorative symbol P22 is displayed smaller than the decorative symbol P12 of the game effect. In addition, the decorative pattern P22 in the special effect mode has a display form that is more simplified than the decorative pattern P12 of the game effect.

  Also, the hold icon display P23 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 from the performance start standby effect to the next performance notification effect shown in FIG. 6 (F) described later is a sub liquid crystal as shown in FIG. 6 (C). It is displayed at the upper center of the display device 6. The hold icon display P23 is displayed smaller than the hold icon display P13 in the normal effect mode, and is a simplified display mode than the hold icon display P13 in the normal effect mode. Note that the display corresponding to the changing icon display P14 is not performed.

FIG. 6D is a diagram showing an example of the effect configuration in the countdown effect that is a special effect executed in the special effect mode.
This countdown effect is an effect executed following the performance start standby effect, and is executed 10 seconds before the start of the music performance effect. During the countdown effect, the countdown image P16 from 10 seconds before is displayed.

In the countdown effect, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 displays a performance song name image P16 that displays the song name of the song performance effect to be started, and a decoration with a simplified decoration pattern on the upper left. The symbol P19 is displayed.
Further, the sub liquid crystal display device 6 moves up from the ascending position during the performance start standby effect to the center of the main liquid crystal display device 5 at 10 seconds before the start of the music performance effect, and then the count down effect is started and the countdown effect is started. During the performance, the countdown image P25 from 10 seconds before is displayed.
From the speaker 24, various music and voices accompanying the game effects are output, and countdown sounds and the like accompanying the countdown effects are output.

FIG. 6E is a diagram showing an example of the effect configuration in the music performance effect which is a special effect executed in the special effect mode.
This music performance effect is an effect executed following the countdown effect. When the performance of the music performance is started, the music stage video by the singer group is displayed.

In the music performance effect, a music performance effect image P48 which is a music stage image of the singer group is displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5.
Further, after the sub liquid crystal display device 6 moves down from the ascending position at the time of the countdown effect to the ascending position at the performance start standby effect, the display screen displays the decorative symbol P22 as the decorative symbol in the special effect mode, the special effect. The game effect image in the special effect mode is displayed by the element image such as the hold icon display P23 as the hold icon display in the mode.
From the speaker 24, various music, voices, and the like accompanying the game performance are output, and music sounds, etc., accompanying the music performance effect are output.

The remaining time until the end of the music performance effect is always displayed in the lower right of the music performance effect image P48, so that the player can enjoy the music performance effect but the remaining time until the music performance effect ends. Can recognize time.
The countdown display of the remaining time displayed in the music performance effect corresponds to third remaining time notification (countdown notification) for prompting the player to end the music performance effect.

FIG. 6F is a diagram showing an example of the effect configuration in the next performance announcement effect which is a special effect executed in the special effect mode.
This next performance announcement effect is an effect executed following the music performance effect. When the next performance announcement production starts, before transition to the all-track release state described later, an image showing the number of days remaining until the performance performance of the new song performance (new song announcement) and the name of the new song are displayed. After shifting to the open state, an image indicating the next song title is displayed.

In the next performance announcement effect, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 displays the next performance announcement image P17 indicating the name of the new song and the number of days remaining until the new song release date, if it is before the release of all songs. If there is, the next performance announcement image P17 indicating the next song title is displayed.
In addition, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6, a game effect image in the special effect mode is displayed by element images such as a decoration symbol P22 as a decorative symbol in the special effect mode and a hold icon display P23 as a hold icon display in the special effect mode. Is displayed.
From the speaker 24, various musical pieces, voices and the like accompanying the game effect are output, and voices and the like accompanying the next performance announcement effect are output.

FIG. 6G is a diagram showing an example of the effect configuration in the DJ effect which is a special effect executed in the special effect mode.
This DJ effect is an effect executed following the next performance announcement effect. When the DJ performance is started, a talk session video by a member of the singer group who has finished the music performance is displayed.

In the DJ effect, on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, the background P11, the decorative symbol P12, the hold icon display P13, the changing icon display P14, and the like are displayed in the same manner as in FIG.
Further, a DJ effect image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 by a DJ image P26 which is an image in which a member of the singer group conducts a talk session.
From the speaker 24, various music, voices, and the like associated with the game effects are output, and conversational sounds associated with the DJ effects are output.
When the moderator effect in FIG. 6 (B) described above to the DJ effect in FIG. 6 (G) are executed, the special effect mode ends, and the normal effect mode is entered.

  FIG. 6H is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect configuration in the normal effect executed in the normal effect mode, and the effect configuration is the same as that in FIG. 6A described above.

  As described above, in the normal effect mode, a game-related effect using the main liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, the frame lamp 25, and the like is executed along with a game using a game ball as a game medium. Here, the game-related effects include both a variation effect associated with a special symbol variation display and a winning effect associated with a special game. Note that the image in the normal effect mode is displayed in the entire area in the present embodiment when only the game-related effects are performed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a measurement process for measuring an elapsed time since the power is turned on is performed, and after the first set time (57 minutes 55 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the power was turned on, Prior to the performance of the music performance (see FIG. 6 (E)), the performance of the host (see FIG. 6 (B)) and the standby performance of the performance start (FIG. 6 (C)) )), A countdown effect (see FIG. 6D) is executed.
This performance before the performance start is forcibly started when the first set time elapses after the power is turned on regardless of the game situation using the game ball. Therefore, by using the island power supply device 500 to start a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on one island at the same time, it is possible to simultaneously start the performance before the performance start on these pachinko gaming machines 1. Is possible.

  These performances before the performance start are related to the music performance performance and the content of the performance, and in this embodiment, the moderator voice output in the moderation performance is the introduction voice related to the music performance performance to be started later. Etc., and the video displayed in the performance start standby production is the production that displays the document video of the preparation or rehearsal scene related to the music performance production to be started after this, and the countdown image displayed in the countdown production is It is an image related to the musical performance performance to be started after this.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the remaining time until the music performance effect is started is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 in a countdown manner (see FIGS. 6A, 6B, 6D, etc.).

  In the present embodiment, the case where the performance before the performance start is related to the content of the performance performance of the music will be described as an example, but other performances before the performance start such as the performance not related to the performance performance of the music is executed. You may do it.

  Next, at the timing when the second set time (1 hour in the present embodiment) has passed since the power is turned on, a music performance effect (playing a new song movie in the present embodiment) is started to perform a new song as unperformed content. (See FIG. 6E). This musical performance performance is forcibly started when the second set time elapses after the power is turned on, regardless of the game situation using the game ball. For this reason, it is possible to simultaneously start a musical performance performance on these pachinko gaming machines 1 by simultaneously starting a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on one island using the island power supply device 500. It is.

Then, after the performance of the music performance is finished, the next performance announcement effect (see FIG. 6 (F)) and the DJ effect (see FIG. 6 (G)) are executed as effects after the performance ends.
Since the performances after the performances are performed after the music performances are completed, the pachinko machines 1 installed on one island are simultaneously activated using the island power supply device 500. It is possible to start the production after the performance is finished at the same time in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  These performances after the performance are related to the performance of the music performance and the content of the performance. In the present embodiment, the next performance announcement effect is the next song after the current song when all songs are released. The next performance notification image showing the new song name and the number of days remaining until the new song announcement date is displayed. If all the songs have been released, the next performance notification image showing the song name of the next song performance production is displayed. In the DJ production, a talk session video related to the current music performance production is displayed.

  Therefore, by using the island power supply device 500 to start a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on one island at a time, the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 have a first set time from power-on. When the performance elapses, the performance before the performance starts is started all at once. When the second set time elapses after the power is turned on, the performance of the music performance is started all at once. When the performance of the music performance ends, the performance starts after the performance ends. It will be.

By the way, the special performance performed in the special performance mode, the performance before the performance start and the performance of the music performance and the performance after the performance are the performance performed independently of the game using the game ball, Since the game using the game ball continues while the performance of the music performance and the performance after the performance ends, it is necessary to make the game performance for this game parallel to the performance before the performance start or the performance performance after the performance or the performance after the performance ends. There is. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game effect is appropriately performed using the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 from the start of the performance before the performance start until the end of the subsequent music performance effect (see FIG. 6 (C), (E), (F)).
As described above, when the pre-performance start effect, the music performance effect, or the post-performance effect image is displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 in which the game-related effect image is displayed in the normal effect mode, the game-related effect is displayed. The effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  Also, when a game-related effect is being executed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 in the special effect mode, a jackpot notice and a jackpot finalizing effect specific to the special effect mode different from the normal effect mode are executed.

  When the performance ends after the performance, the special performance mode is shifted to the normal performance mode, and the game-related performance using the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is returned. Then, in the game-related effects in the normal performance mode after the music performance performance is performed, the performance based on the music performed in the music performance performance is performed. In other words, the production data related to the music that has not been used in the game-related production before the start of the music performance production can be used when the music performance production is executed.

  Note that the musical performance performance is not executed only when one hour has passed since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. In the present embodiment, the music performance performance is 1 after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. It is executed every time. That is, when a musical performance performance of “early winter memory”, which is a new song A, is executed when one hour has passed since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the new song A is “every hour,” Music performance performance of "Early Winter Memory" will be performed. Also, the performance performance for one new song is continued for one week after the first performance performance of the new song is performed, and the performance performance of other new songs is performed every hour for the next week. . In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by repeating such processing, music performance effects for all 12 new songs are executed over a period of about 3 months. It will increase.

Here, in the special effect mode, as described above with reference to FIG. 6, the game-related effect image and the special effect image are displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6. However, under certain conditions, it may be better not to switch immediately according to the screen layout shown in each figure of FIG. Examples of such a case include a case where a variation effect as a game-related effect is being performed, or a case where necessary information must be notified to the player during a big hit.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special effect image is reduced and displayed when it is not necessary to switch immediately according to the screen layout shown in each drawing of FIG.

  FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are screen views showing how the special effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is reduced and displayed under a specific condition.

  First, in FIGS. 7A-1 to 7A-3, when the performance start standby performance shown in FIG. 6C is started, the variation effect started during the moderation effect is shown. The screen transition when not finished is shown.

In this case, the performance standby image P15 is reduced and displayed on the left side of the main liquid crystal display device 5, as shown in FIG.
Then, the reduced display of the performance standby image P15 is continued until the variation effect ends (FIG. 7A-2), and after the variation effect ends, FIG. 7A-3 corresponds to the start of the next variation effect. ), The performance standby image P15 is displayed on the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, and a game-related effect is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (as a decorative pattern in the special effect mode). The decorative icon P22, the hold icon display P23) as the hold icon display during the special effect mode.
Therefore, the performance standby image P15 is prevented from being switched and displayed suddenly in the middle of the fluctuating effect displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, thereby preventing confusion of the player.

  Next, FIGS. 7 (B-1) to (B-3) are screens when executing a jackpot opening effect as a game-related effect during execution of the music performance effect shown in FIG. 6 (E). It is a figure which shows a transition.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 7 (B-1), the music performance performance is being performed, and the music performance performance image P48 is displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, which is executed by the sub liquid crystal display device 6. When the change effect in the middle becomes a display result (for example, 777) showing a big hit, as shown in FIG. 7 (B-2), the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 has an opening image P20 associated with the big hit opening effect. Is displayed in the whole area, a right-handed notification image P18 is displayed on the upper right side of the opening image P20, and a music performance effect image P48 is reduced and displayed on the left side of the opening image P20. During the opening effect, a bar code display image P26 is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 as a privilege (a digital content or the like is available) for the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 7 (B-3), with the end of the opening effect, the music performance effect image P48 that has been reduced and displayed instead of the opening image P20 is displayed over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5. In addition, a right-handed notification image P18 is displayed on the upper right side of the music performance effect image P48, and a round number display image P24 indicating the number of big hits is displayed on the lower right side. At this time, a jackpot image P27 is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to notify the player that the jackpot is being hit.

Therefore, even if a jackpot is generated during the performance of the music performance, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the jackpot has occurred and to make a right strike. Further, as shown in FIG. 7 (B-3), since the jackpot image P27 is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 during the jackpot, even if the music performance is being performed, Appropriate notification can be made regarding the big hit.
7 (B-1) to (B-3) have been described by taking the performance of the music performance as an example, but the performance start standby effect (see FIG. 6 (C)) and the countdown effect (FIG. 6 (D) The same display processing is also performed when a big hit occurs when the next performance announcement effect (FIG. 6F) is being executed. When the countdown effect is being performed, the lower movable device 8b is not moved up to the center of the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  Next, FIG. 8 (C-1) to (C-4) is a time reduction that is executed during the jackpot as a game-related effect during the performance of the music performance shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the screen transition in the case of performing the round in which "challenge chance" which is the effect of no is performed.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 8 (C-1), since the music performance is being performed, the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, and the music performance effect image P48 is displayed. A right-handed notification image P18 is displayed on the upper right, and a round number display image P24 indicating the number of big hits is displayed on the lower right. At this time, a jackpot image P27 is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to notify the player that the jackpot is being hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8C-2, when the “challenge chance” is performed (four rounds), the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 has a challenge chance image that is an image for producing “challenge chance”. (Game effect image) P64 is displayed in the entire area, a right-handed notification image P18 is displayed on the upper right side of the challenge chance image, a round number display image P24 is displayed on the lower right side, and a music performance effect image is displayed on the left side. P48 is reduced and displayed. Note that a big hit image P27 is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  As a result of the “challenge chance”, if it is determined that the time is shortened, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is displayed in the time-shortening round (8 rounds) as shown in FIG. 8C-3. Displays a short time notification effect image P62 for notifying that the short time state is reached after the end of the jackpot (when the short time state is not reached, a non-short time notification image) is displayed in the entire area, and at the upper right of the short time notification effect image P62. A right-handed notification image P18 is displayed, a round number display image P24 is displayed at the lower right, and a music performance effect image P48 is reduced and displayed on the left side. Note that a time-shortening notification image P28 is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6. In the present embodiment, since the period of the “challenge chance” effect is 4 to 8 rounds, the music performance effect image P48 is reduced and displayed between these rounds.

  When the short-time notification round in FIG. 8C-3 ends, an ending display described later is displayed, and after the jackpot is ended, the main liquid crystal display is displayed as shown in FIG. A music performance effect image P48 is displayed on the entire display screen of the device 5, and a game-related effect is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (decoration pattern P22 as a decoration symbol in the special effect mode, special effect mode) The hold icon display P23) is displayed as the hold icon display in the middle. In the time-short state, a right-handed notification image P18 is displayed at the upper right of the music performance effect image P48.

Therefore, even when the “challenge chance” is executed during the performance of the performance of the music performance, the “challenge chance” is executed for the player, and the time is shortened. ) And right-handing can be made.
8 (C-1) to (C-4) have been described by taking the performance of the music performance as an example, the performance start standby effect (see FIG. 6 (C)) and the countdown effect (FIG. 6 (D) The same display processing is also performed when a round in which a “challenge chance” is executed when the next performance announcement effect (FIG. 6F) is being executed. When the countdown effect is being performed, the lower movable device 8b is not moved up to the center of the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  Next, FIGS. 8D-1 to 8D-4 show the variation effects started during the next performance announcement effect when the DJ effect execution start time shown in FIG. 6G is reached. Shows the screen transition when is not finished.

In this case, the next performance announcement image is displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8 (D-2) from the layout display during the next performance announcement performance shown in FIG. 8 (D-1). P17 is displayed in the entire area, and the DJ image P26 is reduced and displayed on the left side of the next performance announcement image P17.
Then, the reduced display of the DJ image P26 is continued until the variation effect ends (FIG. 8 (D-3)), and after the variation effect ends, according to the start of the next variation effect, FIG. 8 (D-4). As shown in FIG. 3, the entire liquid crystal display device 5 displays a variation effect by the background P11, the decorative symbol P12, the hold icon display P13, and the changing icon P14 on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6. DJ image P26 is displayed.
Therefore, the DJ image P26 is prevented from being switched and displayed suddenly in the middle of the changing effect displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 5, thereby preventing confusion of the player.

  As described above, the case where the special effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is reduced and displayed under specific conditions has been described with reference to FIGS. When the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in a reduced size, the music performance effect remaining time until the music performance effect is finished is also displayed in a countdown manner in the reduced music performance effect image P48. .

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow of a music performance effect performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in order to show the flow of the musical performance performance in an easy-to-understand manner, FIG. 9 shows the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on at 9:00 am. Further, for the convenience of explanation, illustration of the pre-performance start performance performed prior to the music performance performance and the post-performance performance performed after the music performance performance is omitted are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced into the pachinko hall on Saturday, 11/23, for example, the default normal performance is performed until one week has passed since the introduction. For example, two types of background images, a first default background image and a second default background image, are stored in advance as background images to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 in a state in which no musical performance performance has been performed. Until the first musical performance performance of the “early winter memory”, which is the new song A, is executed, either the first default background image or the second default background image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  Then, on the Saturday of 11/30, when one week has passed since the pachinko gaming machine 1 was introduced into the pachinko hall, when 3 hours had passed since the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was turned on, a new song was created in the special performance mode. The first musical performance performance of A (“Early Winter Memory”) is executed (see FIG. 9B). In FIG. 9B, since the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at 9:00 am, the first song performance performance of the new song A is performed at exactly noon, and then the song performance of the new song A is performed every hour thereafter. An example in which an effect is executed is shown.

  When the first music performance effect of the new song A is executed, the normal effect that mainly uses the image data related to the new song A is performed in the normal effect mode. In other words, taking a background image as an example, only two background images, the first default background image and the second default background image, can be used. A new song A background image created in advance based on the data can be newly used. Since the new song A background image is set to have a higher selection rate than the first default background image and the second default background image for one week when the musical performance performance of the new song A is performed, the first default background image and the second default image It is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 at a higher rate than the default background image.

  Subsequently, on Saturday, 12/7, when one week has passed since the first performance performance of the new song A was executed, when 3 hours have passed since the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was turned on, The first musical performance performance of “Winter Vacation”, which is the new song B, is executed (see FIG. 9C).

  When the first music performance effect of “Winter Vacation”, which is the new song B, is executed, a normal effect that mainly uses image data related to the new song B is performed in the normal effect mode. In other words, the background image will be described as an example. Although the three default images of the first default background image, the second default background image, and the new song A background image can be used, the first default background image cannot be used. Instead, a new song B background image created in advance based on the image data constituting the movie data of the new song B to be reproduced in the music performance effect can be newly used. Since the new song B background image is set to have a higher selection rate than the second default background image and the new song A background image for one week when the performance of the new song B is performed, the second default background image and the new song A background are set. It is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 at a higher rate than the image.

  Thus, every time the first music performance effect of each new song is executed, the available background images increase, and the background image related to the latest new song is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 at the highest rate.

Note that the music performance production schedule illustrated in FIG. 9 is an example, and the first music performance performance of the new song A is performed on the first day of the introduction of the pachinko machine 1, or the time interval at which the performance performance of the same new music is performed. It is also possible to make a change such as making the time other than one hour or a non-constant time.
As the announcement performance, in the next performance announcement performance of FIG. 6 (F), for example, on the day before Saturday, 11/30 when the first song performance production of new song A is performed, the remaining days until the first song performance production date are announced. A notification effect for displaying the next performance notification image P17 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is executed.
For example, on the Saturday of 11/30 when the first music performance effect of the new song A is performed, the next performance notification image P17 that notifies that the first music performance effect will be performed today is displayed on the main liquid crystal display before the first music performance effect is started. A notification effect to be displayed on the display screen of the device 5 is executed.
Further, for example, when the remaining time until the start time of the performance performance of the new song A becomes less than a predetermined time, a performance announcement for causing the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to count down the remaining time in the normal performance of FIG. The next performance announcement effect is executed by the effect image P47.
In addition, for example, when the first performance performance of the new song A is finished, the next performance announcement that announces that the first performance performance of the next new song B will be performed one week later in the next performance announcement performance of FIG. 6 (F). A notification effect for displaying the image P17 on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is performed.

  Thus, in the sub liquid crystal display device 6, various notification effects relating to the music performance effect are executed.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the performance of the music performance in the state where all the songs are released, which is performed in the pachinko machine 1 after all the new songs are performed. As shown in FIG. 9 (D), when the first song performance performance of the twelfth new song L is performed, the music performance performance is performed every hour from 2/22 Saturday when one week has passed since that day. The types of new songs to be performed change sequentially (see FIG. 10). And as illustrated in FIGS. 10A to 10D, the music performance effect of the new song A is performed on 1/22 Saturday when 1 hour has passed since the power is turned on. The performance of the new song B is performed on 1/23 Sunday when 1 hour has passed since the power is turned on, and the performance of the new song C is performed on 1/24 Monday when 1 hour has passed since the power is turned on. As such, even during the same time period, the type of new song performed varies from day to day.

Therefore, from the first performance performance of the new song A until the completion of the one-week performance performance of the new song L, the performance performance of all the songs that could not be enjoyed without playing every week in one day. I can enjoy it.
Also, from the new song A on Saturday, 2/22, when the performance of the music performance ends, the next performance announcement performance for the next performance performance (one hour later) will be part of the performance performance of the music. To be executed.
The next performance announcement performance will be described with reference to FIG. 10A as an example. When the performance performance of the new song A is started at 10:00 and this performance performance performance ends, the performance performance of the new song B is continued next time. The next performance announcement production is performed to notify that the production will be performed. When the performance performance of the new song B is started at 11:00 and the performance performance of the new song C is finished, the next performance announcement performance is executed to notify that the performance performance of the new song C will be performed next time. In this way, the next performance announcement effect is executed.

  In addition, since the type of new song to be performed varies depending on the day even in the same time zone, even players who can play only during a certain time zone can enjoy the performance performance of various types of new songs. .

  Below, the normal performance in the normal performance mode as described above, the special performance in the special performance mode, the performance before the performance start (moderation performance, the performance start standby performance, the countdown performance), the music performance performance, the performance after the performance end (next performance announcement) The internal configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the processing performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for realizing the performance and the DJ performance will be described in detail.

[Configuration of control device of pachinko gaming machine 1]
On the back side of the game board 2, a control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls to be paid out as prize balls. As illustrated in FIG. 11, the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is based on a game control board 100 that controls execution of determination, command transmission processing to the effect control board 130, and the command received from the game control board 100. An effect control board 130 for comprehensively controlling effects, an image sound control board 140 for controlling effects by images and sounds, effects by various lamps and lighting devices 7, and effects by the upper movable member 8a and the lower movable member 8b. The lamp control board 150 and the like are controlled. In the present embodiment, the game control board 100 functions as a game control unit that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 function as an effect control unit that controls the effect. .

[Configuration of Game Control Board 100]
The game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, and a main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to determination and the number of payout balls based on a program stored in the main ROM 102. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 101 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The game control board 100 includes a first start port switch 111, a second start port switch 112, an electric tulip opening / closing unit 113, a gate switch 114, a big winning port switch 115, a big winning port control unit 116, a normal winning port switch 117, The specific prize opening switch 118, the specific area opening / closing part 119, the V prize opening switch 120, the lose prize opening switch 121, the V prize opening opening / closing part 122, and the respective indicators 41 to 43 and 45 to 47 constituting the display 4 are connected. Has been.

  The first start port switch 111 detects that a game ball has won the first start port 11 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The second start port switch 112 detects that a game ball has won the second start port 12 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The electric tulip opening / closing part 113 opens and closes the second start port 12 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be able to transmit driving in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. To do. The gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The big prize opening switch 115 detects that a game ball has won the big prize opening 13 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. In response to a control signal from the game control board 100, the special prize opening control unit 116 opens and closes the special prize opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to a plate that closes the special prize opening 13 so as to be able to transmit the drive. To do. The normal winning port switch 117 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning port 14, and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100.

  The specific winning opening switch 118 detects that the game ball has won the specific winning opening 19 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The specific area opening / closing unit 119 opens and closes the specific winning opening 19 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the blade member 90 so as to be able to transmit driving in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. The V winning opening switch 120 detects that a game ball has won the V winning opening 92 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The lose prize winning switch 121 detects that the game ball has won the lose prize winning opening 93 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The V winning opening / closing unit 122 opens and closes the V winning opening 92 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the slide member 94 so as to be able to transmit driving.

  The main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 detects from the first starting port switch 111, the second starting port switch 112, the big winning port switch 115, the normal winning port switch 117, the V winning port switch 120, or the lose prize port switch 121. When the signal is input, the payout control board (not shown) is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won, and based on the information from the payout control board, Manage the number.

  This payout control board is configured to have a drive motor or the like that sends out a prize ball from a ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2 to the tray 28.

  The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Further, the main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. If it is determined that the winning game is a big win, the special winning opening 13 is opened and closed via the special winning opening control unit 116.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 opens and closes the specific winning opening 19 by operating the blade member 90 via the specific area opening / closing unit 119, The V winning opening 92 is opened and closed by operating the slide member 94 via the V winning opening opening / closing section 122. When the game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the operation of the slide member 94, the big winning opening 13 is opened and closed via the big winning opening control section 116, as in the case where it is determined that the game is a big win.

  Further, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input, and executes normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. And when it determines with opening the 2nd starting port 12, the 2nd starting port 12 is opened temporarily by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening / closing part 113.

  Further, the main CPU 101 causes the respective display devices 41 to 43 and 45 to 47 constituting the display device 4 to execute the processing described above with reference to FIG.

  Further, a radio wave detection sensor (not shown) for detecting an electromagnetic wave having a predetermined electric field strength or higher in a predetermined band is connected to the game control board 100, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) for detecting a magnetic force having a predetermined strength or higher is connected. The main CPU 100 executes error output processing in accordance with the detection status of these sensors. The error output processing includes error display processing for displaying an error in the main liquid crystal display device 5, error sound output processing by sound output, and error signal output for outputting a signal to an equipment device such as an external management computer. Processing.

  The main CPU 100 confirms the detection status of the game balls in the first start port switch 111, the second start port switch 112, the big winning port switch 115, the normal winning port switch 117, and the specific winning port switch 118, for example, for 1 minute. When the predetermined number or more of the game balls are detected, or when a game ball is detected at the closed winning opening, etc., the error output process described above is executed by determining that an illegal prize has occurred. .

[Configuration of Production Control Board 130]
The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, an RTC (real time clock) 134, and a volume switch 135. The sub CPU 131 performs a calculation process when controlling the presentation based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 131 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

The RTC 134 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 134 operates with this power when the power from the island power supply device 500 is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when the power from the island power supply device 500 is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the RTC 134 operates. Timekeeping operation is performed by electric power supplied from a backup power source composed of a capacitor (not shown) incorporated in the machine 1.
For this reason, the RTC 134 can measure the current date and time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not turned on.

Note that a built-in battery may be provided in place of the backup power source, and the RTC 134 may be operated by power supplied from the built-in battery.
By replacing the built-in battery, it is possible to increase the discharge capacity that can be stored compared to the backup power supply. Therefore, the RTC 134 can maintain a sufficient life even with the built-in battery alone.
Even in this case, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is supplied, the RTC 134 performs a measurement operation using the power supplied from the island power supply device 500, and when the power of the pachinko machine is not supplied, By performing the measurement operation with the built-in battery, it is possible to extend the life as compared with the case where only the built-in battery is used as the measurement operation power source, and while the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 Since the measurement operation is more stable than when the power is not supplied to the power source, the time deviation is reduced.

  As will be described in detail later, the overall CPU 141 (see FIG. 12) of the image sound control board 140 acquires information indicating the current date and time (hereinafter referred to as “RTC information”) from the RTC 134 and starts the above-described performance. Controls the pre-production, music performance, and post-performance. The RTC 134 corresponds to a time measuring means.

The volume switch 135 is a setting switch for setting an initial value of the output volume output from the speaker, and is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is used by a staff in the game hall.
This volume switch 135 is a slide switch that can be set in four stages. In setting 1, “small” is set as the initial value of the output volume, and in setting 2, “medium” is set as the initial value of the output volume. In setting 3, “large” is set as the initial value of the output volume, and in setting 4, “eco mode” is set.
In this embodiment, the volume value can be set in 10 steps. When set to setting 1 (output volume “low”), the first level is initially set as the volume initial value, and setting 2 (output) When the volume is set to “medium”), the fifth stage is initially set as the initial volume, and when setting 3 (output volume “high”) or setting 4 (eco mode) is set, the initial volume is 10 Stages are initially set.

The volume switch 135 is connected to the sub CPU 131. The sub CPU 131 determines which of the four setting levels the current setting value of the volume switch is based on the input status of the input port, and sets each setting. Is stored as a volume setting value. When the setting 4 (eco mode) is set, a power saving function described later is activated.
Until the volume setting value is changed from the initial volume value by the volume adjustment by the player, which will be described later, this initial volume value is stored as the current volume setting value. When the volume is changed from the initial value, the changed volume setting value is stored as the current volume setting value.

It should be noted that the current volume setting value stored is that the volume adjustment by the player is not performed until 120 seconds elapses after the variation effect is stopped or until 120 seconds elapses. If the sub CPU 131 determines that the current sound volume setting value is smaller than the sound volume initial setting value, the sound volume initial setting value is updated and stored as the current sound volume setting value. When the value is larger than the initial volume setting value and when the sub CPU 131 determines that the initial volume setting value is not stored as the current volume setting value.
The place where the volume switch is provided is not limited to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the volume switch may be another physical switch or an electrical switch (for example, ON / OFF by operating the touch panel).

The sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets the effect contents of the normal effect based on the game information related to the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the special game, etc. transmitted from the game control board 100. In that case, the input of the operation information from the production | presentation button 26 or the production | presentation key 27 may be received, and the production | generation content according to the operation information may be set. Further, the sub CPU 131 transmits a command for instructing execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. Further, the sub CPU 131 transmits a command for instructing an output sound volume based on the current sound volume setting value to the image sound control board 140.
In the present embodiment, the setting of the production contents of the production before the performance start, the performance of the music performance, and the production after the performance is performed on the image sound control board 140 instead of the production control board 130 in the present embodiment.

[Configuration of Lamp Control Board 150]
Although not shown in the drawing, the lamp control board 150 includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM. The CPU of the lamp control board 150 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operation of the frame lamp 25 and the lighting device 7 based on a program stored in the ROM. The RAM of the lamp control board 150 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU executes the program or a work area for data processing.

  The ROM of the lamp control board 150 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating various light emission patterns of the light emitting elements included in the frame lamp 25 and the illumination device 7. The operation pattern data is data indicating various operation patterns of the upper movable device 8a and the lower movable device 8b.

  The CPU of the lamp control board 150 reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 out of the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM, and the light emitting elements of the frame lamp 25 and the lighting device 7. Controls the light emission. Further, the CPU of the lamp control board 150 reads out the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the ROM, and reads the upper movable device 8a and the lower movable device. The drive of the motor which operates 8b is controlled.

[Configuration of Image Sound Control Board 140]
FIG. 12 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the image sound control board 140. The image sound control board 140 performs image display control of the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 and audio output control from the speaker 24. The image sound control board 140 includes a general CPU 141, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 142, an sound DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 143, a control ROM 144, a control RAM 145, a sound ROM 146, an SDRAM 147, and a VRAM 149.

  The overall CPU 141 stores the image data stored in the CGROM 148 with respect to the VDP 142 based on the programs and various tables stored in the control ROM 144, the commands received from the effect control board 130, and the RTC information acquired from the RTC 134. An instruction to display on the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is given. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list.

  Here, the display list is composed of commands for instructing execution of drawing in frame units. The type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The processing for creating this display list will be described in detail later.

  The overall CPU 141 instructs the sound DSP 143 to output the sound data stored in the sound ROM 146 from the speaker 24.

  The control ROM 144 is configured by a mask ROM, and stores a control program for the overall CPU 141, a display list generation program for generating a display list, various tables (see FIG. 35), and the like.

  The control RAM 145 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the general CPU 141 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The CGROM 148 stores effect data necessary for executing a normal effect, an effect before the start of performance, an effect of music performance, an effect after the end of performance, and the like. The CGROM 148 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and includes sprite data (one piece of image data) including a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels), and a plurality of pieces of image data. Compressed and stored movie data consisting of a collection of The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 148 stores, without compressing, palette data or the like in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other.

  This CGROM 148 includes, as data for performing the special performance before the performance start and the performance of the music performance and the performance after the performance, the movie data for the performance before the performance start, the movie data for the performance of the performance, and the performance movie after the performance ends. Data is stored separately for each new song.

  Based on the display list created by the general CPU 141, the VDP 142 specifies which new song performance before performance start, performance of the music performance, and execution of the performance after the performance are instructed, and the specified new song for the performance before the performance start The data, the music performance performance movie data, and the performance movie data after the performance are read from the CGROM 148 and reproduced.

  Further, the CGROM 148 stores normal effect data and special effect data as sprite data used for generating a normal effect image. The normal effect data is default data that can be used regardless of whether or not the music performance effect is performed, and image data of the first default background image and the second default background image corresponds to this. On the other hand, the special effect data is sprite data (for example, image data of the new song A background image and the new song B background image) that can be used only when the first performance performance of the music is performed. Is stored separately for each new song. The special effect data is generated in advance by editing the image data constituting the music performance effect movie data.

  In the present embodiment, in order to increase the appearance rate of the normal effect using the newly available special effect data as much as possible, the normal effect using the normal effect data every time the usable special effect data increases. The display list creation table is switched every time the first song performance performance of a new song is performed so that the appearance rate of the normal performance using the normal performance data will eventually become zero, gradually decreasing the appearance rate of Selection is performed. This special selection will be described in detail later.

  The VDP 142 reads normal effect data or special effect data from the CGROM 148 based on the display list created by the overall CPU 141, and executes a drawing process for performing the normal effect. Since the special performance data is not read when the first music performance performance has never been performed, a drawing process using the normal performance data is performed. For example, a default background image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5. Is displayed. On the other hand, for example, when the initial performance performance of the new song A is performed, the special performance data for the new song A is read, and the drawing process using the special performance data is performed, for example, the background of the new song A An image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the use restriction of the special performance data of the new song is released when the initial performance performance performance of the new song is performed.

  Note that only a part of the image data stored in the CGROM 148 may be compressed. As a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 149 is configured by an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed, and includes a display list storage area 1491, a development storage area 1492, a full screen frame buffer 1493, a reduced image frame buffer 1494, a main liquid crystal display. And a sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496.

  The display list storage area 1491 temporarily stores the display list output from the overall CPU 141. The expanded storage area 1492 stores image data that has been read from the CGROM 148 and expanded. The full screen frame buffer 1493 is a drawing frame buffer for drawing an image displayed in the entire area. The reduced image frame buffer 1494 is a drawing frame buffer for drawing a special effect image (see FIGS. 7 and 8) reduced and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5. The main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 is a display frame buffer for temporarily storing image data transferred from the full-screen frame buffer 1493 (and the reduced image frame buffer 1494). The sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 is a frame buffer used for both drawing and display for drawing and displaying the image data displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  The VDP 142 decompresses the image data stored in a compressed state in the CGROM 148 and stores the decompressed image data in the expanded storage area 1492. Also, the VDP 142 performs drawing processing using the full screen frame buffer 1493, the reduced image frame buffer 1494, or the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 based on the display list stored in the display list storage area 1491. The VDP 142 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the display frame buffer (main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 or sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496) in the VRAM 149. The processed RGB signals are output to the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

Connected to the acoustic DSP 143 are an acoustic ROM 146 for storing various acoustic data relating to music, voice, sound effects, etc., and an SDRAM 147 used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 143. The acoustic DSP 143 reads the acoustic data corresponding to the instruction from the general CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM 146 to the SDRAM 147 and executes data processing. The acoustic data after the data processing is sent to the speaker 24 at an output volume corresponding to the set volume value. Output.
[Power saving function]

Here, the power saving function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the power saving function is validated when the setting is set to 4 (eco mode) by the volume switch 135 described above.

  When the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 does not receive any command from the main CPU 101 for 120 seconds after transmitting a customer waiting effect start command to be described later, or when the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is not detected. The power saving mode shift command for shifting the power consumption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the normal power mode to the power saving mode for saving power is sent to the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140 and the CPU of the lamp control board 150. Send.

The overall CPU 141 that has received this power saving mode transition command lowers the illuminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 5 by 50% from the illuminance in the normal power mode, and turns off the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Then, the overall CPU 141 instructs the VDP 142 to draw an image dedicated to the power saving mode.
In addition, in order to reduce power consumption as much as possible, the power saving mode-dedicated image indicates that power saving is in progress, such as “Under power-saving performance until the start of performance” in the central area of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6. And the remaining time until the start of the next musical performance performance are displayed in characters that are large enough to be recognized by the player who will play the game, and areas other than these characters are displayed blank.

  Then, the overall CPU 141 instructs the sound DSP 143 to set the speaker volume to 0. As a result, in the power saving mode, basically no sound is output.

  Further, the CPU of the lamp control board 150 that has received the power saving mode transition command reduces the illuminance of all the light emitting elements to 85% of the illuminance in the normal power mode.

  When shifting to the special effect mode and executing the special effect during the power saving mode, the overall CPU 141 sets the speaker volume to the audio DSP 143 at an output volume of 40% of the output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value. Instruct to output. Therefore, when shifting to the special effect mode and executing the special effect during the power saving mode, the output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value is reduced to 40%.

The general CPU 141 transmits to the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 that the transition to the special effect mode is received, and the sub CPU 131 that has received this transmits to the CPU of the lamp control board 150 that the transition to the special effect mode has been performed. Thus, the CPU of the lamp control board 150 performs light emission output with the illuminance obtained by reducing the illuminance of all the light emitting elements to 85%.
When the special effect mode is executed in the power saving mode, the special liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 are not used (the backlight is turned off), and the special sound and light emitting element are used. An effect may be executed. Further, the special effect in the power saving mode may be executed only by either one of the sound and the light emitting element.

Further, when the transition to the special effect mode is performed during the power saving mode and the special effect is executed, the power saving performance image may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6.
In this case, the overall CPU 141 instructs the VDP 142 to draw a power saving special effect image. This power-saving special effect image includes a “preliminary performance until the start of performance” in the central area of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 during the performance period of the performance before the performance start (moderation performance, performance start standby performance, countdown performance). The remaining time until the start of the performance of the music performance is displayed in a size that can be recognized by the player who will play the game, and areas other than these characters are displayed blank. During the performance before the performance start, the backlight of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is turned off.

  During the performance of the music performance, the main liquid crystal display device 5 indicates that the performance of the music performance is being performed and the remaining performance until the end of the music performance performance. The time is displayed in characters large enough to be recognized by the player who will play the game, and the area other than this character is displayed in blank. During the performance of the music performance, the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is turned off.

  In addition, during the performance period of the performance after the performance is finished (next performance announcement performance, DJ performance), the sub liquid crystal display device 6 performs the next performance (released) of the music performance performance that will be performed next time, such as “next performance performance”. Announcements are displayed in characters that are large enough to be recognized by the player who will play the game, and areas other than these characters are displayed in blanks. During the performance after the performance, the backlight of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is turned off.

In addition, when shifting to the special effect mode and executing the special effect during the power saving mode, the special effect in the normal power mode may be executed by shifting to the normal power mode.
The transition timing to the normal power mode at this time is that the game is started while the special effect in the power saving mode is being executed and the game ball is won at the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. The sub CPU 131 receives the change start command transmitted from the main CPU 101, and the effect content corresponding to the change start command is selected by the sub CPU 131. Is transmitted, and the control according to the received command is executed by the central CPU 141 and the lamp control board 150 that have received the command.
Also, for example, when the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is detected. In this case, the sub CPU 131 that has detected the operation transmits a command for instructing the execution of the effect to the central CPU 141 and the CPU of the lamp control board 150, and is different from the above in that the main CPU is not involved.

  Also, at the start of the special effect, a game-related effect (fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) has been executed (not waiting for the customer), but after the special effect starts, the sub CPU 131 receives the customer wait command. When transitioning to the power saving mode when the special effect is still being executed even after 120 seconds have passed since the reception of the power, the power saving mode is not yet entered when the 120 seconds have elapsed, and the power saving is completed after the special effect ends. You may make it transfer to mode.

The transition from the power saving mode to the normal power mode is performed when any command is received from the main CPU 101 or when an operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is detected.
Then, when shifting from the power saving mode to the normal power mode, the sub CPU 131 that receives any command transmitted from the main CPU 101 executes an effect on the CPU of the general CPU 141 and the lamp control board 150. A command to be instructed is transmitted, and the central CPU 141 and the CPU of the lamp control board 150 receive this command, whereby each CPU shifts from the power saving mode to the normal power mode.

[Timer interrupt processing by game control board 100]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100. The game control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 13 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. . Note that the processing of the game control board 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 13 and subsequent figures is performed according to a command issued by the main CPU 101 based on a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  First, the main CPU 101 executes random number update processing for updating various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, and regular symbol random numbers (step S1).

  Here, the jackpot random number is a random number for determining the jackpot, the jackpot, or the loss. The jackpot design random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The small hitting design random number is a random number for determining the type of two types of big hits generated when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hitting game. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach when it is determined that the reach is lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second start port 12. The jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number are incremented by “1” every time the process of step S1 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for performing the processing of step S1, and each random number returns to “0” after reaching a preset maximum value.

  Subsequent to the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 executes a switch process when a detection signal is input from each switch (step S2). This switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

  Following the processing of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination, displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and shows the result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the determination symbol is executed (step S3). This special symbol process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 includes a process of executing normal symbol determination, causing the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4). This normal symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S4, the main CPU 101 performs the electric tulip process for operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening / closing part 113 when it is determined that the second start port 12 is opened as a result of the normal symbol determination. Is executed (step S5). This electric tulip process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S5, the main CPU 101 activates the blade member 90 via the specific area opening / closing part 119 and determines the V prize opening opening / closing part when it is determined that the small symbol is won in the special symbol process of step S3. A specific area opening control process for operating the slide member 94 via 122 is executed (step S6). The specific area release control process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 23 and FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S6, the main CPU 101 controls the big winning opening control unit 116 when it is determined that the big winning is made in step S3, or when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small winning game. Then, a special winning opening opening control process for opening the special winning opening 13 is executed (step S7). The special winning opening opening control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the process of step S7, the main CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for controlling the payout of the prize ball according to the winning of the game ball (step S8).

  Subsequent to the process of step S8, the main CPU 101 transmits to the effect control board 130 information necessary to determine various commands and effect contents set (stored) in the main RAM 103 in the process step before step S8. Processing is executed (step S9). By executing the process of step S9, game information relating to special symbol determination and special games is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, the game information includes a change start command, a symbol determination command, an opening command, a round start command, a round end (inter-round interval) command, an ending command, and the like, which will be described later.

[Switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 14 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Subsequent to the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the first start port switch 111, as illustrated in FIG. 14, and is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. For the random numbers (big hit random number, big hit design random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number), a first start port switch process is executed to obtain a value at the time when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input ( Step S21). The first start port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the second start port switch 112, and various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, small bonus symbol updated as appropriate by the process of step S1. For the random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number), a second start port switch process is executed to acquire a value at the time when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input (step S22). The second start port switch process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Then, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate switch 114, and the value at the time when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input with respect to the normal symbol random number that is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. The gate switch process for acquiring the above is executed (step S23). This gate switch processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[First Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 15 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 15, following the random number update process in step S <b> 1, the main CPU 101 indicates a detection signal from the first start port switch 111 (indicating that the first start port switch 111 is “ON”). Based on whether or not an ON signal is input, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 111 is turned “ON” (step S211). Here, when it is determined that the first start port switch 111 has been turned “ON” (step S211: YES), the number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether it is less than the maximum reserved number Umax1 (in the present embodiment, “4”) of the first special symbol determination (step S212).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (step S212: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S213). Then, as the acquisition information used for the first special symbol determination, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S214 to S217), a hold command for notifying the image sound control board 140 that the first special symbol determination is held is set in the main RAM 103 (step S218).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the result of the first special symbol determination is either a big hit or a loss, and the first special symbol determination is not determined to be a small hit that generates a small hit game. Has been. For this reason, the first start port switch process does not include a step of acquiring a small hitting design random number for determining the type of the two big hits.

  Although not shown in FIG. 15, it is assumed that the illegal winning determination in the first start port switch 111 described above is executed in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred according to the detection status of the first start-up switch 111, an illegal winning error 1 command is set, and the illegal winning error 1 command is transmitted to the sub CPU 131 by the transmission process described above. .

[Second Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 16 is a detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 16, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 (the second start port switch 112 is “ON”) following the first start port switch process in step S <b> 21. On the basis of whether or not an ON signal indicating that the second start port switch 112 has been turned ON is determined (step S221).

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the second start port switch 112 is “ON” (step S221: YES), for example, a long hit game flag, a short hit game flag, or a small hit game stored in the main RAM 103. Based on whether or not the flag is set to “ON”, it is determined whether or not a special game is being played (a jackpot game is being played) (step S222).

  Here, the long win game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a long win game consisting of a plurality of long open round games that open the big winning opening 13 is long, and is set to “ON” at the start of the long win game. Is set to “OFF” at the end of the long hit game. The short win game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a short win game consisting of a plurality of short open round games that open the big winning opening 13 is short, and is set to “ON” at the start of the short win game. And set to “OFF” at the end of the short hit game. The small hit game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit game for opening the specific winning opening 19 is being executed, and is set to “ON” at the start of the small hit game, and “ OFF "is set.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the special game is not being played (during the jackpot game) (step S222: NO), is the special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 being displayed? It is determined whether or not (step S223). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S223: NO), as the acquisition information used for the second special symbol determination, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number , And fluctuation pattern random numbers are acquired, and these random numbers are associated and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (steps S224 to S228).

  As described above, when the game ball wins the second starting port 12 when the special game is not being displayed and the special symbol is not being displayed, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers used for the second special symbol determination in the main game. The data is directly stored in the determination storage area of the RAM 103. This determination storage area is a storage area for storing various random numbers used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. When a game ball is won at the first starting port 11, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers used for the first special symbol determination in the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103, and actually performs the first special symbol determination. When the change display of the special symbol is started, various random numbers stored in the reserved storage area are shifted to the determination storage area.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the game ball has won the second starting port 12 during the special symbol change display or during the special game, the special symbol change related to the second special symbol determination corresponding to the winning is made. When the display cannot be started immediately, the second special symbol determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 is not performed. On the other hand, when a game ball wins at the first start port 11, even if the variable symbol display related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the winning cannot be started immediately, the right of the first special symbol determination is 4 is the upper limit.

  Although not shown in FIG. 16, it is assumed that the illegal winning determination in the second start port switch 112 described above is executed in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred according to the detection status of the second start port switch 112, an illegal winning error 2 command is set, and the illegal winning error 2 command is transmitted to the sub CPU 131 by the transmission process described above. .

[Gate switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S23 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 17, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the gate switch 114 (ON signal indicating that the gate switch 114 is turned “ON”) following the second start-up port switch process in step S <b> 22. It is determined whether or not the gate switch 114 is turned “ON” based on whether or not is input (step S231).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 has been turned “ON” (step S231: YES), the normal symbol determination suspension number T stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the determination is less than the maximum hold number Tmax (for example, “4”) (step S232).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number T is less than the maximum hold number Tmax (step S232: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the hold number T to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S233) and is held by this process. A normal symbol random number used for normal symbol determination is acquired and stored in the main RAM 103 (step S234).

[Special symbol processing by game control board 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 18 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol process in step S3 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 18, the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 determines whether the long hit game flag, the short hit game flag, or the small hit game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON”. Whether or not a special game is being played (a jackpot game is being played) is determined (step S301). Here, if it is determined that the special game is being played (the jackpot game is being played) (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process in step S4.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the special game is not being played (during the jackpot game) (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being changed (step S302). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not various random numbers related to the second start opening winning are stored in the determination storage area of the main RAM 103 ( Step S303). Specifically, various random numbers acquired in response to the game ball winning the second start opening 12 are directly stored in the determination storage area, and various random numbers related to the second start opening winning are stored. Is stored in the determination storage area. Based on whether or not this flag is stored when various random numbers are stored in the determination storage area, various types of information stored in the determination storage area are stored. It is determined whether the random number is related to the second start opening winning or the first starting opening winning. Here, when it is determined that the random number related to the second start opening winning is stored (step S303: YES), the process proceeds to step S307 described later.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the random number related to the second start opening winning is not stored in the determination storage area (step S303: NO), the main CPU 101 stores the first special symbol determination hold number U1 stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not “1” or more (step S304). Here, when it is determined that the hold count U1 is “1” or more (step S304: YES), the hold count U1 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S305). Then, a shift process for the storage area of the main RAM 103 is executed (step S306). Specifically, the jackpot random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number related to the first special symbol determination stored in the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 are first stored in the reserved storage area. (The oldest) is shifted to the determination storage area, and the remaining one is shifted to the determination storage area.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S306 or determines that the random number related to the second start opening winning is stored in the determination storage area (step S303: YES), it is stored in the determination storage area. The jackpot determination process is executed based on the random number that is stored (step S307). By executing the jackpot determination process, it is determined whether the jackpot, the small hit, or the loss, and setting information of a determination symbol indicating the determination result is set in the main RAM 103. When it is determined that the game is a big hit (1 type big win), the type of the big win is determined, and when it is determined that the jackpot is a game, the game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game. The kind of two types of jackpots that will be triggered by this is determined. The jackpot determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S307, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process (step S308). Specifically, referring to the variation pattern table stored in advance in the main ROM 102, the determination result of the jackpot determination in step S307, the type of determination symbol set in the main RAM 103, the current gaming state, the first special symbol The variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the reach random number and the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area together with the determination hold number U1 and the jackpot random number used in the process of step S307. By performing the processing in step S308, it is also determined whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach.

  Following the processing of step S308, the main CPU 101 determines whether the symbol setting information set in step S307, the symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination. Information indicating whether or not, a variation pattern setting information set in the process of step S308, information indicating which of the effects with reach or effects without reach, information regarding the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, etc. A change start command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S309). This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9.

  On the other hand, the effect control board 130 needs to specify the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the variation start command received from the game control board 100, and perform either the effect with reach or the effect without reach. To determine the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by acquiring the variation time during which the special symbol is variably displayed. Then, in accordance with the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, what kind of effect image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5, what kind of sound is output from the speaker 24. Is output, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 25 is determined, whether the upper movable device 8a or the lower movable device 8b is to be operated, and the effect of the determined content is determined by the image sound control board 140. And the lamp control board 150 is executed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S309, the main CPU 101 starts the special symbol variation display based on the setting information included in the variation start command set in step S309 (step S310). The special symbol variation display is performed when the processing in steps S307 to S309 is performed in a state where the random number related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area. 41. When the process of steps S307 to S309 is performed in a state where random numbers relating to the second special symbol determination are stored, the second special symbol display 42 is used.

  Subsequent to step S310, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the customer waiting flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S311). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a customer waiting state, the right for the first special symbol determination is not reserved, and the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol is not held. It is set to “ON” at the timing when the special symbol variation display related to symbol determination is not performed, and is set to “OFF” when the special symbol variation display is started again.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the customer waiting flag is set to “ON” (step S311: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the customer waiting flag to “OFF” (step S312). Then, when the process of step S312 is executed, or when it is determined that the customer waiting flag is not set to “ON” (step S311: NO), measurement of the variation time is started (step S313).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S313 or determines that the special symbol is changing (step S302: YES), the main CPU 101 is selected by the process of step S308 from the start of the measurement of the changing time in step S313. It is determined whether or not the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), a series of special symbol processing ends, and the processing proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the variation time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. Is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9. Thereby, the process etc. which stop-display the decoration symbol which was variably displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 in the aspect which shows the determination result of special symbol determination, etc. are performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation display started in the process of step S310 (step S317). At that time, the determination symbol (big hit symbol, small bonus symbol, or lost symbol) set in the process of step S307 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display which has variably displayed the special symbol.

  Subsequent to the process of step S317, the main CPU 101 resets the variation time that started the measurement in the process of step S313 (step S318), starts the first special game if it is a big win, and if the big hit The stop process including the process of starting the small hit game is executed (step S319). This stop process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the number U1 of the first special symbol determination is not “1” or more (step S304: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the customer waiting flag is set to “ON”. (Step S321). If it is determined that the customer waiting flag is set to “ON” (step S321: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process in step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the customer waiting flag is not set to “ON” (step S321: NO), the main CPU 101 sets a customer waiting command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the customer waiting state in the main RAM 103. (Step S322), the customer waiting flag is set to "ON" (Step S323). This customer waiting command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9. As a result, on the effect control board 130, the stop state of the last executed variable effect is displayed until a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the customer waiting command is transmitted, and the predetermined control time is displayed. When time elapses, a customer waiting effect for displaying the title of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a demonstration effect is started.

[Big hit judgment processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 19 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S307 of FIG. When the main CPU 101 determines that the random number related to the second special symbol determination is stored together with the flag in the determination storage area (step S303: YES), or when the process of step S306 is executed, it is exemplified in FIG. In this manner, the jackpot determination is executed (step S3071). Here, when executing the jackpot determination relating to the second start opening winning, the jackpot determination table relating to the first starting opening winning is executed with reference to the second starting opening winning jackpot determination table stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. When doing so, the first start opening winning jackpot determination table stored in advance in the main ROM 102 is referred to.

  In the second start opening winning jackpot determination table, a determination result and a random value are stored in association with each other. Specifically, a random value for the big hit, a random value for the small hit, and a random value for the loss are stored. When the main CPU 101 executes the jackpot determination related to the second start opening winning a prize, the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches any random value defined in the second starting opening winning jackpot determination table It is determined whether it is a big hit (one type big hit), a small hit or a loss based on whether or not.

  In the first start opening winning jackpot determination table, a determination result and a random value are stored in association with each other. Specifically, a random value for jackpot and a random value for loss are stored. When the main CPU 101 executes the jackpot determination related to the first start opening winning prize, the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches any random number value defined in the first starting opening winning jackpot determination table It is determined whether it is a big hit (1 type big hit) or lost.

  As described above, the main CPU 101 determines that the various random numbers stored in the determination storage area are satisfied when the start condition is established such that various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination are stored in the determination storage area. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not to perform the first special game.

  Based on the determination result of step S3071, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a one-type big hit (step S3072). Here, when it is determined that it is one kind of big hit (step S3072: YES), the type of big hit is determined with reference to the symbol determination table at the time of big hit stored in the main ROM 102 (step S3073).

  In the symbol determination table at the time of jackpot, the hit type and the random number value are stored in association with each other. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number stored in the determination storage area together with the jackpot random number matches a random jackpot value specified in the symbol determination table at the jackpot time. Determine the type. Examples of the type 1 big hit in the first special symbol determination include “per 7R without time reduction”, “per 8R with time reduction”, and “abrupt time reduction”, and examples of the type 1 big hit in the second special symbol determination. Examples include “per 8R without time reduction”, “per 15R with time reduction”, and “per 8R with time reduction” (see FIG. 4).

  The main CPU 101 sets the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S3073 as setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S3074). As a result, the jackpot symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and the first special game is executed. Will be.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the special symbol determination is not one type big hit (step S3072: NO), it is based on whether or not the flag related to the second special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area. Then, it is determined whether or not this special symbol determination is a first special symbol determination related to the first start opening prize (step S3075). Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is made (step S3075: YES), if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is not a big hit, it is a loss, so the lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 as setting information. (Step S3076). As a result, the lost symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol display 41.

  When the determination result of the second special symbol determination is not a big hit, the determination result is a small hit or a loss. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not the first special symbol determination (step S3075: NO), that is, if the current special symbol determination is the second special symbol determination, the result of the jackpot determination in step S3071 It is determined whether or not is a small hit (step S3077). Specifically, based on whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches the random number value corresponding to the jackpot specified in the second start opening winning jackpot determination table. 2 It is determined whether the determination result of the special symbol determination is a small hit or a loss.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is not a small hit (step S3077: NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3076. In this case, the lost symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the second special symbol display 42.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (step S3077: YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. Is determined (step S3078). Specifically, the type of the small hit is determined based on which random number value specified in the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit matches the random number for small hit stored in the determination storage area To do. Then, the determined small hit symbol is set in the main RAM 103 as setting information (step S3079). Thereby, the small winning symbol set here at the time of the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the second special symbol indicator 42.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 in this way, the above-described small hit game is started. Then, when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, two kinds of big wins are made, and the second special game is performed with the small hit game as the first round. The type of big hit of two types is determined based on the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42. For this reason, the process which determines the kind of small hits can be regarded as the process which determines the kind of two types big hit. Examples of the two types of big hits are “per 15R with time reduction”, “per 8R with time reduction”, and “per 8R without time reduction” (see FIG. 4).

[Processing during stop by game control board 100]
FIG. 20 is a detailed flowchart of the stop process in step S319 of FIG. After resetting the variation time by the process of step S318, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a one-type big hit based on the result of the big hit determination of step S3071 as illustrated in FIG. Step S3191). Here, when it is determined that it is a type 1 big hit (step S3191: YES), it is determined whether the first special game executed for the type 1 big hit is a long hit game or a short hit game ( Step S3192). Specifically, based on the setting information, the jackpot symbol set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S3074 determines whether a long hit game or a short hit game is performed. In the present embodiment, a short win game is played only when “suddenly a short win”, and a long win game is played for other types of big hits.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the game is a long game (step S3192: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the long game flag to “ON” (step S3193), and determines that the game is not a long game (step S3193). Step S3192: NO), the short winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S3194).

  Following the process of step S3193 or the process of step S3194, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the short-time game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S3195). The short-time game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the short-time game state, and is set to “ON” when the normal game state shifts to the short-time game state. It is set to “OFF” when returning to the normal gaming state from. If it is determined that the short-time game flag is set to “ON” (step S3195: YES), the short-time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S3196).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a one-type big hit (step S3191: NO), it determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is set to “ON” (step S3197). If it is determined that the short-time game flag is set to “ON” (step S3197: YES), the short-time game remaining number W stored in the main RAM 103 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step). S3198). The short game remaining number W indicates the remaining number of times that the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed in the short time gaming state. When the short game residual number W becomes “0”, the game The state is returned from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S3198, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving remaining game count W is “0” (step S3199). Here, when it is determined that the short time remaining game count W is “0” (step S3199: YES), the short time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S3200). As a result, the gaming state is returned from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

  The main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3200, determines that the time-saving game flag is not “ON” (step S3197: NO), or determines that the time-saving game remaining count W is not “0” ( In step S3199: NO, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit like the processing in step S3077 (step S3201). If it is determined that the game is a small hit (step S3201: YES), the small hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S3202).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3196, determines that the time-saving game flag is not set to “ON” (step S3195: NO), or executes the process of step S3202, the main CPU 101 opens to the main RAM 103. A command is set (step S3203). Here, the term “opening” refers to a period from the start of a long win game or a short win game until the first big winning opening 13 is opened, or the first special winning opening 19 is opened after the small winning game is started. It means the period until it starts. On the other hand, the opening command is a command for notifying that the opening is started, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9.

[Normal design processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 21 is a detailed flowchart of the normal symbol process in step S4 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 21, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” following the special symbol process in step S3 (step S401). ). This auxiliary game flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the electric tulip 17 is in an auxiliary game in which the operation of returning to the closed posture after maintaining the open posture for a predetermined time is being performed a predetermined number of times, and is set to “ON” during the auxiliary game. It is set and set to “OFF” when it is not in an auxiliary game.

  If it is determined in step S401 that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S401: YES), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process in step S5.

  When determining that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (step S401: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 45 is being displayed (step S402). ), When it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the number T of the normal symbol determination is “1” or more (step S403). Here, when it is determined that the number of holds T is not “1” or more (step S403: NO), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process of step S5.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of holds T is “1” or more (step S403: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the number of holds T to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S404), and executes a hit random number determination process. (Step S405). Specifically, the oldest normal symbol random number among the normal symbol random numbers stored in the main RAM 103 by the process in step S234 (see FIG. 17) is the winning value related to the normal symbol determination stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win based on whether or not it matches any of the above.

  Following the process of step S405, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win based on the determination result of step S405 (step S406). In step S406: YES), a winning symbol to be stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the normal symbol display 45 is set in the main RAM 103 (step S407). On the contrary, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is not successful (step S406: NO), the lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 (step S408).

  Following the processing of step S407 or step S408, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state based on whether or not the time-saving gaming flag is set to “ON”. Is determined (step S409). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S409: YES), the normal symbol change time for displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45 is set to, for example, 25 seconds (step S410). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S409: NO), the normal symbol variation time is set to 2 seconds, for example (step S411). Thus, the normal symbol variation time set by the process of step S410 or step S411 is temporarily stored in the main RAM 103.

  Following the processing of step S410 or step S411, the main CPU 101 starts normal symbol variation display by the ordinary symbol display 45 (step S412), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation display (step S413). ).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol change display is being performed by the normal symbol display 45 (step S402: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to end the normal symbol change display (step S415). Specifically, whether or not to end the normal symbol variation display based on whether or not the elapsed time when the measurement was started by the process of step S413 has reached the normal symbol variation time set in step S410 or step S411. Determine whether. Here, when it is determined not to end the normal symbol variation display (step S415: NO), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process of step S5.

  When the main CPU 101 determines to end the normal symbol fluctuation display (step S415: YES), the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 45, and is set in the main RAM 103 by the process of step S407. The winning symbol or the lost symbol set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S408 is stopped and displayed (step S416). And the elapsed time which started measurement by the process of step S413 is reset (step S417). Then, similarly to the process of step S406, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is correct (step S418). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win (step S418: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S419). Thus, the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON”, whereby the auxiliary game for operating the electric tulip 17 is started.

[Electric tulip processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 22 is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip process in step S5 of FIG. Following the normal symbol process in step S4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 22 (step S501). If it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (step S501: NO), the process proceeds to the specific area release control process in step S6.

  When determining that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S501: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the electric tulip 17 is operating (step S502). If it is determined that the electric tulip 17 is not operating (step S502: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S503), as in the process of step S406. Here, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S503: YES), as the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17, the operation of opening the second start port 12 for 0.1 second is performed once. The pattern is set in the main RAM 103 (step S504). On the contrary, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S503: NO), that is, when it is the short-time gaming state, the second start port 12 is set as the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 for 0.3 seconds. An operation pattern for performing the opening operation five times is set in the main RAM 103 (step S505).

  After setting the operation pattern in step S504 or step S505, the main CPU 101 causes the electric tulip opening / closing unit 113 to start the operation of the electric tulip 17 in the set operation pattern (step S506).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S506 or determines that the electric tulip 17 is operating (step S502: YES), has the operation of the electric tulip 17 started in the process of step S506 been completed? It is determined whether or not (step S507). If it is determined that the operation of the electric tulip 17 has been completed (step S507: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “OFF” (step S508). Thereby, the auxiliary game is ended.

[Specific Area Open / Close Control Processing by Game Control Board 100]
When the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed by the specific area release control process in step S6. Hereinafter, the specific area release control process executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. Here, FIG. 23 and FIG. 24 are detailed flowcharts of the specific area release control processing in step S6 of FIG.

  Subsequent to the electric tulip process in step S5, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small hit game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIGS. 23 and 24 (step S601). Here, if it is determined that the small hit game flag is not set to “ON” (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the big winning opening release control process of step S7.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the small hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S601: YES), for example, the elapsed time since the opening command related to the small hit game is set in the process of step S3203. Based on whether or not has reached a preset opening time, it is determined whether or not a small hit game is being opened (step S602). If it is determined that the opening is in progress (step S602: YES), it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening release control process of step S7.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the main CPU 101 resets the number X of winning game balls to the specific winning port 19 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S604), and opens / closes the specific area. The opening control of the specific winning opening 19 by the unit 119 is started (step S605), and the measurement of the elapsed time since the opening control is started is started (step S606). By performing the processing of step S605, the blade member 90 performs the operation of closing the specific winning opening 19 after opening it for 3.2 seconds once.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not opening in the small hit game (step S602: NO), for example, based on the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is ending. Determination is made (step S608). Here, when it is determined that the ending in the small hit game is not in progress (step S608: NO), the specific winning opening switch 118 is turned “ON” based on the presence / absence of the detection signal input from the specific winning opening switch 118. It is determined whether or not (step S609). Here, when it is determined that the specific winning opening switch 118 is “ON” (step S609: YES), it is determined that one gaming ball has won the specific winning opening 19, and the winning number X of the gaming balls is calculated. The value updated by “1” is updated (step S610).

  When the process of step S610 is executed, the main CPU 101 determines that the specific winning opening switch 118 is not “ON” (step S609: NO), or if the process of step S606 is executed, the process of step S606 is performed. It is determined whether or not the elapsed time when the measurement is started matches a preset time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (step S611). Here, when it is determined that the set time has been reached (step S611: YES), the V winning opening opening / closing unit 122 is operated to operate the slide member 94 to open the V winning opening 92 (step S612). Thereby, the above-mentioned two types of big hits can be generated.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S612 or determines that the elapsed time does not coincide with the set time (step S611: NO), based on the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the V winning opening switch 120, It is determined whether or not the V prize opening switch 120 is “ON” (step S613). Here, when it is determined that the V prize opening switch 120 has been turned “ON” (step S613: YES), the V prize flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S614). This V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not a game ball is won at the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game and two kinds of big wins are generated, and no gaming ball is won at the V winning opening 92 Is set to “OFF”, and is set to “ON” when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S614, or determines that the V winning opening switch 120 is not “ON” (step S613: NO), whether or not it is the closing timing of the V winning opening 92 Is determined (step S615). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the V winning opening 92 was opened. Here, when it is determined that it is the closing timing (step S615: YES), the V winning opening 92 is closed by the V winning opening / closing unit 122 (step S616).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S616 or determines that it is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 92 (step S615: NO), the main CPU 101 determines the blades based on the elapsed time when the measurement is started by the process of step S606. It is determined whether or not the specified opening operation of the member 90 (one operation of opening the specific winning opening 19 for 3.2 seconds in this embodiment) has been completed (step S618).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified release operation has not ended (step S618: NO), the main ball 102 stores the number X of game balls won in the specific winning opening 19 in the current small hit game in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the number of game balls Xmax (for example, “6”) that defines the closing timing of the specific winning opening 19 (step S619). Here, when it is determined that the number X of winning prizes does not coincide with the number of gaming balls Xmax (step S619: NO), the process proceeds to the big prize opening opening control process of step S7.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning number X matches the number of game balls Xmax (step S619: YES), or when it is determined that the prescribed release operation has ended (step S618: YES), the process of step S605 is performed. The opening control of the started specific winning opening 19 is ended (step S620), the elapsed time at which the measurement was started in step S606 is reset (step S621), and the ending time measurement is started (step S622). Here, the ending refers to a period from the end of opening the specific winning opening 19 to the end of the small hit game.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the ending is being performed in step S608 (step S608: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 24, the ending time at which the measurement is started in the process of step S622 is preset. It is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed based on whether or not the ending time for the game has been reached (step S625). Here, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S625: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening release control process of step S7.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the preset ending time has elapsed (step S625: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the small hit game flag to “OFF” in order to end the small hit game (step S626), and receives a V prize. It is determined whether or not the flag is set to “ON” (step S627). If it is determined that the V winning flag is not set to “ON” (step S627: NO), it is determined that the game ball has not won the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, and step S7. The process proceeds to the special prize opening opening control process. In this case, the special game ends only with the small hit game.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the V winning flag is set to “ON” (step S627: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the V winning flag to “OFF” (step S628) and follows the small hit game. In order to start the long open round game, the long winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S629), and the short-time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S630).

  Although not shown in FIG. 23, it is assumed that the illegal winning determination at the specific winning opening switch 118 described above is executed in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred according to the detection status of the specific prize opening switch 118, an illegal prize error 3 command is set, and the illegal prize error 3 command is transmitted to the sub CPU 131 by the transmission process described above.

[Large winning opening opening control processing by game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening control process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 25 is a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in step S7 of FIG. Following the specific area release control processing in step S6, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the long winning game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 25 (step S71). Here, when it is determined that the long winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S71: YES), the long winning game control process is executed (step S72). This long hit game control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the long winning game flag is not set to “ON” (step S71: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the short winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S75). . Here, when it is determined that the short hit game flag is “ON” (step S75: YES), a short hit game control process is executed (step S76). The short hit game control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of step S76 is executed, when the process of step S72 is executed, or when it is determined that the short hit game flag is not set to “ON” (step S75: NO), the process of step S8 Processing proceeds to award ball processing.

[Outline of opening pattern of special prize opening 13 and production during special game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the effects during the special game will be described.

  FIG. 26 (A) shows the relationship between the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the performance during the game per 8R length when a game per 8R length is played for "8R without time limit" or "per 8R with time limit". FIG. When the opening command related to the long win game of 1 type is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the opening effect is started as illustrated in FIG. Then, as the long open round game in which the grand prize opening 13 is opened for a maximum of 29 seconds is repeatedly executed with a predetermined interval time between them, an effect during the round is executed each time the long open round game is started. Is done. This in-round effect includes, for example, an effect that displays the number of times that the special game has been performed continuously from the short-time game state to the normal game state, and an effect that informs the current number of rounds. When all the long open round games are finished and the ending command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the ending effect is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses.

  FIG. 26B is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the big winning opening 13 and the effect during the 15R short win game when the 15R short win game is played for “suddenly short win”. When the opening command related to the short hit game of 1 type jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the short win effect is started. In this case, a short open round game that opens the grand prize winning opening 13 for 0.2 seconds is executed 15 times at a predetermined time interval (for example, every 1 second), but the time required for the short win game is relatively short. A series of the above short win effects is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses after all short open round games are finished and an ending command is transmitted.

  FIG. 26C is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the effect during the game per 15R length when a game per 15R length is played for “per 15R with time reduction”. When a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, from the second round, a long open round game in which the large winning opening 13 is opened long is repeatedly executed with a predetermined interval time interposed therebetween. During the 15R long game, in addition to the in-round effect described with reference to FIG. Specifically, a music selection screen (not shown) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 in the second round (during the first long open round game after the end of the small hit game). The music selected by the player using the effect key 27 before the third round is started is continuously played during the third and subsequent rounds. That is, the music selected by the player is output from the speaker 24 and the video of the music is reproduced on the main liquid crystal display device 5. The music reproduction selected by the player in this way may be performed when the game is controlled in the short-time game state after the game is finished per 15R length.

  In this embodiment, the case where music selection is performed in the second round of the game per long game will be described. However, a configuration in which music selection can be performed at any time during the game per long game may be employed. Or you may employ | adopt the structure which can perform music selection, when the game is controlled in a short-time game state. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure which can perform a music selection during a short hit game.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment also has a feature that the number of music pieces that can be selected by the player increases every time the first music performance performance is performed. Specifically, during the game per 15R length before the first song performance performance of the new song A is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting only the default song is displayed. On the other hand, during the game per 15R length after the first song performance performance of the new song A is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting the default song or the new song A is displayed. Then, when the first song performance performance of the new song B is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting the default song, the new song A, or the new song B is displayed. If the player selects a song but the performance of the song has started, the selected song cannot be played immediately, or the song playback is interrupted. After the production is finished, the selected music is played from the beginning.

[Game control processing per long by the game control board 100]
FIG. 27 is a detailed flowchart of the long hit game control process in step S72 of FIG. When the main CPU 101 determines that the long winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S71: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 27, for example, the opening command related to the long winning game by the process of step S3203 Based on whether or not the elapsed time from setting has reached a predetermined opening time, it is determined whether or not a long hit game is being opened (step S721). Here, when it is determined that the opening is being performed (step S721: YES), it is determined whether the opening time has passed based on whether the elapsed time has reached the predetermined opening time (step S722). ). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S722: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S722: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the number of rounds Rmax of the special game, the operation pattern of the big prize control unit 116, and the like, and stores these pieces of information in the main RAM 103. (Step S723). By executing the processing of step S723, various times related to the long game such as the interval time between rounds and the next round, and the ending time after the end of the final round are also set.

  Following the processing of step S723, the main CPU 101 resets the winning number Y of game balls to the big winning opening 13 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S724), and the long hit game also stored in the main RAM 103. The round number R in the middle is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S725). The number of rounds R is set to “0” before the start of the game per long, and is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S725 is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S725, the main CPU 101 starts the opening control of the special winning opening 13 by the special winning opening control unit 116 (step S726), and the opening time that is an elapsed time from the start of the release control. Measurement is started (step S727). Then, a round start command for notifying that the long open round game has started is set in the main RAM 103 (step S728).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening in the long hit game is not in progress (step S721: NO), for example, based on the information indicating the time point in the long hit game in which the current state is stored in the main RAM 103, for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the ending immediately after the end of the final round is in progress (step S729). If it is determined that ending is in progress (step S729: YES), the process proceeds to step S744 described later.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that ending in the long hit game is not in progress (step S729: NO), for example, based on information indicating the current point in the long hit game stored in the main RAM 103. Then, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval (between the round and the next round) (step S730). Here, when it is determined that it is during the interval (step S730: YES), it is determined whether or not the interval time set by the process of step S723 has elapsed since the big winning opening 13 was closed at the end of the previous round. Determination is made (step S731). If it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S731: YES), the process proceeds to step S724 because the timing for starting the next round is reached. Conversely, if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S731: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not in the interval (step S730: NO), the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the round and determines whether or not the big winning opening is based on the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the big winning opening switch 115. It is determined whether or not the switch 115 is “ON” (step S733). Here, when it is determined that the big prize opening switch 115 is “ON” (step S733: YES), it is judged that one game ball has won the big prize opening 13, and the number Y of game balls won is calculated. The value is updated to the value obtained by adding “1” (step S734).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S728, executes the process of step S734, or determines that the big prize opening switch 115 is not “ON” (step S733: NO), the main CPU 101 It is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed from the opening start (step S735). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which measurement is started by the process of step S727 has reached a specified opening time (29 seconds in the present embodiment) stored in advance in the main ROM 102.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified opening time has not elapsed (step S735: NO), the winning number Y of the game balls in the current round stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls Ymax (for example, “9”) defining the closing timing of the special winning opening 13 coincides (step S736). If it is determined that the winning number Y does not match the gaming ball number Ymax (step S736: NO), the process proceeds to a winning ball process in step S8.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning number Y matches the number of gaming balls Ymax (step S736: YES), or when it is determined that the specified opening time has elapsed (step S735: YES), the big winning opening control unit 116 terminates the opening control of the special winning opening 13 (step S737). At this time, a round end (inter-round interval) command (not shown) is set.

  Subsequent to the process in step S737, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round number R of the game per long stored in the main RAM 103 matches the round number Rmax set in the process in step S723. (Step S738). Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S738: NO), this is the elapsed time since the big winning opening 13 is closed in order to control the start timing of the next round. Measurement of the interval time is started (step S739). The interval time when the measurement is started by the process of step S739 is used for the process of step S731.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the round number R matches the round number Rmax (step S738: YES), the main CPU 101 starts measuring the ending time (step S740) and resets the round number R stored in the main RAM 103. Then, an ending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S742). This ending command is a command for notifying that the final opening of the special winning opening 13 has been completed, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S742 or determines that the ending is being performed (step S729: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed (step S744). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time at which measurement is started by the process of step S740 has reached the set ending time set by the process of step S723. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S744: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the set ending time has elapsed (step S744: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the long hitting game (step S745). Then, in order to end the long winning game, the long winning game flag is set to “OFF” (step S746). The gaming state setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Although not shown in FIG. 27, it is assumed that the above-described illegal prize determination by the special prize opening switch 115 is executed during the special prize opening control in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred according to the detection status of the big prize opening switch 115, an illegal prize error 4 flag is set.

[Short hit game control processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 28 is a detailed flowchart of the short hit game control process in step S76 of FIG. When the main CPU 101 determines that the short win game flag is set to “ON” (step S75: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 28, for example, the opening command related to the short win game is executed by the process of step S3203. Whether or not the short hit game is being opened is determined based on whether or not the elapsed time since setting has reached a predetermined opening time (step S761). Here, when it is determined that the opening is being performed (step S761: YES), it is determined whether the opening time has passed based on whether the elapsed time has reached the predetermined opening time (step S762). ). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S762: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S762: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the number Rmax of special games, the operation pattern of the special winning prize control unit 116, and stores these pieces of information in the main RAM 103. (Step S763). By executing the process of step S723, various times related to the short hit game such as the interval time between rounds and the next round, and the ending time after the end of the final round are also set.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S763, the main CPU 101 updates the round number R in the short hit game stored in the main RAM 103 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S764). This round number R is set to “0” before the start of the short hit game, similarly to the case where the long hit game is performed, and is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S764 is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S764, the main CPU 101 starts the opening control of the special winning opening 13 by the special winning opening control unit 116 (step S765), and the opening time which is an elapsed time since the opening control is started. Measurement is started (step S766).

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the opening in the short win game is not in progress (step S761: NO), for example, based on information indicating the time point in the short hit game in which the current state is stored in the main RAM 103, for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the ending immediately after the end of the final round is in progress (step S767). If the main CPU 101 determines that the ending in the short win game is not being performed (step S767: NO), for example, based on information indicating the time point in the short win game that the current state stored in the main RAM 103 is. Then, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval (step S768). Here, if it is determined that the interval is in progress (step S768: YES), it is determined whether or not the interval time set by the process of step S763 has elapsed since the big winning opening 13 was closed at the end of the previous round. Determination is made (step S769). If it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S769: YES), the process proceeds to step S764 because it is time to start the next round. On the other hand, when it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S769: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the interval is not in progress (step S768: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a specified opening time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 13 (step S771). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S766 has reached a specified opening time (0.2 seconds in this embodiment) stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. . Here, when it is determined that the specified opening time has not elapsed (step S771: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified opening time has elapsed (step S771: YES), the main CPU 101 causes the special winning opening control unit 116 to end the opening control of the special winning opening 13 (step S772).

  Following the process of step S772, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round number R of the short hit game stored in the main RAM 103 matches the round number Rmax set by the process of step S763. (Step S773). Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S773: NO), this is the elapsed time since the big winning opening 13 is closed in order to control the start timing of the next round. Measurement of the interval time is started (step S774). The interval time when the measurement is started by the process of step S774 is used for the process of step S769.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the round number R matches the round number Rmax (step S773: YES), the main CPU 101 starts measuring the ending time (step S775), and resets the round number R stored in the main RAM 103. Then, the ending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S777). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9, similarly to the ending command related to the long hit game.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S777 or determines that the ending is being performed (step S767: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed (step S779). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time at which measurement is started by the process of step S775 has reached the set ending time set by the process of step S763. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S779: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the set ending time has elapsed (step S779: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the short hit game (step S780). Then, in order to end the short hit game, the short hit game flag is set to “OFF” (step S781).

  Although not shown in FIG. 28, it is assumed that the above-described illegal prize determination by the special prize opening switch 115 is executed in the same way as in FIG. 27 during the special prize opening opening control in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred according to the detection status of the big prize opening switch 115, an illegal prize error 4 command is set, and the illegal prize error 4 command is transmitted to the sub CPU 131 by the transmission process described above.

[Game state setting process by game control board 100]
FIG. 29 is a detailed flowchart of the gaming state setting process in step S745 in FIG. 27 and step S780 in FIG. This gaming state setting process is a process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the long winning game or the short winning game is ended to the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state.

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special game played this time is a long hit game based on, for example, which of the long hit game flag and the short hit game flag is set to “ON” ( Step S7451). Here, if it is determined that the game is not long hit (step S7451: NO), that is, if the short hit game flag is set to “ON”, the process proceeds to step S7452.

  In the present embodiment, since the short hit game is played only when the result of the first special symbol determination is suddenly short hit, the short time is always given after the short hit game is played. Therefore, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving game flag to “ON” in step S7452. Then, the short time remaining game count W is set to “100” (step S7453).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the game is a long winning game (step S7451: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current long winning game is a long winning game following the small hit game (step S7454). In the present embodiment, when a long hit game is performed following the small hit game, that is, when two types of big hits are made, the long hit game flag is set to “ON” by the process of step S629 (see FIG. 24). On the other hand, when only a long winning game is performed without playing a small hit game, that is, in the case of one type big hit, the long hit game flag is set to “ON” by the process of step S3193 (see FIG. 20). . Therefore, based on which processing step the long hit game flag is set to “ON”, it can be determined whether or not the current long hit game is a long hit game following the small hit game.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the game is not a long winning game following the small winning game (step S7454: NO), the main CPU 101 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 at the start of the long winning game. Based on the jackpot symbol, it is determined whether or not there is a short time after the end of the long hit game (step S7455). On the contrary, when it is determined that the game is a long hit game following the small hit game (step S7454: YES), the long hit is based on the small hit symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 at the start of the small hit game. It is determined whether or not there is a short time after the game is over (step S7456).

  Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result in step S7455 or step S7456 is a short time (step S7457). If it is determined that there is a short time (step S7457: YES), step S7452 and step The process of S7453 is executed. Thus, the game is controlled in the short game state when the second start port 12 is easily opened until the special symbol determination is executed 100 times after the long hit game is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no time saving (step S7457: NO), the processing of step S7452 and step S7453 is not performed, and therefore the second start port 12 is difficult to be opened after the long hit game is completed. The game is controlled in the normal game state.

  When the series of game state setting processes is completed, the process proceeds to step S746 (see FIG. 27) when the long hit game ends, and when the short hit game ends, the process proceeds to step S781 (see FIG. 28). ) Will proceed.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control board 130]
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a CTC cycle, which is a cycle for performing timer interrupt processing to be described later. And sub CPU131 repeats the random number update process which updates the production random number etc. which are used in order to determine the content of production with the predetermined period shorter than a CTC period. That is, the sub CPU 131 repeats the timer interrupt process at the CTC cycle while repeating the random number update process at a predetermined cycle while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 30, the timer interruption process executed in the effect control board 130 will be described. Here, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the effect control board 130. Similar to the timer interrupt process performed on the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 30 every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds). Note that the processing performed on the effect control board 130 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 30 and the subsequent steps is performed according to a command issued by the sub CPU 131 based on a program stored in the sub ROM 132.

  First, when receiving a command as game information from the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 executes a command reception process (step S10). Details of this command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the process of step S10, a volume initial value setting process for setting an initial value of the output volume is executed (step S11). This volume initial value setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 has been operated based on whether or not the operation information is input from the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 (step S12). If it is determined that the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 has been operated (step S12: YES), an operation command for notifying that is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S13). By transmitting this operation command to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150, processing for realizing the effect on the effect according to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is performed.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines “NO” in step S12 or if the process of step S12 is executed, the sub CPU 131 executes a command transmission process (step S14). Specifically, the command set in the sub-RAM 133 by the processing in step S10 or step S12 is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. By performing this command transmission process, the image acoustic control board 140 is instructed to execute an effect by image display, audio output, etc., and an effect is produced by lighting of various lamps and the operation of the upper movable device 8a or the lower movable device 8b. Is instructed to the lamp control board 150. The command transmission processing instructs the lamp control board 150 to turn on various lamps and to execute an effect by the operation of the upper movable device 8a or the lower movable device 8b.

The sub CPU 131 detects a menu operation command for displaying various menus to the overall CPU 141 by detecting an operation of the effect button 26 while the variable effect is stopped when the number of stored memories is 0 or during the customer waiting effect. Send. Receiving this command, the general CPU 141 displays a menu screen (not shown) for displaying various menus in the entire area.
The menu displayed on the menu screen includes game history (today, 1 week, 1 month) display, game description display, reach expectation display, and music performance schedule display (the current music performance schedule can be confirmed by calendar display). There are mini-game display (fortune-telling and fortune-telling), log-in display, and log-out display. The player can select a desired menu by operating the effect button 26 and the effect key 27, and can browse various display contents.
Each time the sub CPU 131 detects an operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, the sub CPU 131 transmits an effect button operation command or an effect key operation command to the overall CPU 141, and the overall CPU 141 displays it according to the menu display scene at that time. To switch characters or display characters.

  On this menu screen, while displaying any of game history display, game description display, reach expectation display, music performance schedule display, login display, and logout display (first menu display), Always displays the remaining time from the end of the previous music performance until the start of the next music performance production, and the player views these displays (or login operation, logout operation), etc. Even in the state, the start time of the next musical performance performance can be recognized.

On the other hand, while the mini game display (fortune-telling or fortune-telling) is displayed (second menu display), the remaining time is not counted down. The reason is that the time during which the player displays these second menus is shorter than the time during which the first menu is displayed, so that the second menu display is displayed. This is because not much time has elapsed since the time previously recognized by the player.
The remaining time display (countdown display) until the next music performance effect displayed on this menu screen is displayed in order to prompt the player to start the music performance effect together with the remaining time display of the customer waiting effect described later. This corresponds to the second remaining time notification (countdown notification).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a player code issued from an external server when the player registers in advance with a portable terminal in an external server operated in association with the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. By obtaining and entering the obtained player code into the gaming machine, the personal game history from the start of the game to the end of the game can be browsed, game points according to the game content can be added, and the player's preference It is possible to customize a combined variation effect.
The login display in the menu is an input screen display for inputting the obtained player code to the gaming machine, and the logout display is for inputting to the gaming machine that the game is to be ended when the player ends the game. Is an input screen display.
By logging in, it is possible to customize game effects, start collecting personal game histories, accumulate game points, and logout to generate information corresponding to the personal game history and game points (for example, 2 (Dimensional code) is output and this information is received by the portable terminal, so that the personal game history and game points can be viewed.

[Command reception processing by effect control board 130]
Hereinafter, the command reception process executed in the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. Here, FIGS. 31 to 33 are detailed flowcharts of the command receiving process in step S10 of FIG. The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not a hold command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received (step S101). If it is determined that a hold command has been received (step S101: YES), the number of holds for the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133 is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S102). Then, a hold display command for instructing the update of the hold display image indicating that the first special symbol determination is held is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S103). This hold display command is transmitted to at least the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S103 or determines that the hold command has not been received (step S101: NO), it is determined whether or not the changing effect accompanying the changing display of the special symbol is being executed. Determination is made (step S104). Specifically, for example, the variation time of the special symbol is specified based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation start command transmitted from the game control board 100, and the variation start command is received. Based on whether or not the variation time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is being executed.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is not being executed (step S104: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the game control board 100 (step S105). . Here, when it is determined that the change start command has been received (step S105: YES), the change start command is analyzed (step S106).

  In the variation start command, as described above, the determination symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination processing, the setting information indicating whether the effect with reach or the effect without reach is performed, and the setting information of the variation pattern , Information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is included. Therefore, by analyzing the variation start command, the result of the special symbol determination is identified, whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach, and the variation time during which the special symbol is variably displayed is identified. In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified.

  When the variation start command is analyzed, the sub CPU 131 executes variation effect pattern selection processing based on the analysis result (step S107).

  Although not shown in the figure, the sub-ROM 132 has at least four effects, namely, a jackpot effect table, an effect table with lose reach, an effect table without lose reach, and an effect table with respect to the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol. An effect table is stored. Each of these effect tables is provided with a plurality of tables corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the game control board 100. For example, tables for 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds are provided in the effect table without losing reach, and tables for 1 minute, 1 minute 30 seconds, and 2 minutes are provided in the jackpot effect table. ing. The sub CPU 131 selects one table from the plurality of tables based on the setting information included in the change start command. For example, when the setting information includes information indicating “losing”, information indicating that “reaching-free production” is performed, and information on a variation pattern indicating that the “variation time” of the special symbol is 4 seconds, The sub CPU 131 selects the lossless reach effect table for 4 seconds.

  In the effect table, effect random numbers and effect patterns are associated with each other. The sub CPU 131 obtains the value at the time when the change start command is received for the effect random number that is updated each time the above-described random number update process is performed, and stores a number of effect patterns stored in the selected effect table. One effect pattern is selected by reading an effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in advance.

  Thereby, the effect pattern (decorative pattern variation pattern, etc.) of the variation effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5, whether or not to operate the upper movable device 8a or the lower movable device 8b, the upper movable device 8a or the lower movable device. When the device 8b is operated, the contents of effects by each effect means such as the operation pattern, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 25, and the output pattern of the sound output from the speaker 24 regarding the variable effect are determined.

  As described above, the effect content and the start / end timing are set in the effect control board 130 based on the game information (various commands) transmitted from the game control board 100 for the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol. . On the other hand, the type of new song (music) played in the above-mentioned music performance production, the time during which the music performance production is performed, the main liquid crystal display device during the music performance production, during the performance before the performance starts or during the performance after the performance ends The screen configuration 5 is set on the image sound control board 140 regardless of the game information. The processing in the image sound control board 140 will be described in detail later.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 sets a change effect start command for instructing start of a change effect of the effect pattern selected in the process of step S107 in the sub RAM 133 (step S108).

  This variation effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thereby, the fluctuating effect in which the effect pattern is determined on the effect control board 130 is realized by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

  Subsequent to step S108, the sub CPU 131 updates the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133 to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S109).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is being executed (step S104: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the symbol determination command is received from the game control board 100 (step S104). 111). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step S111: NO), the process proceeds to step S11.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the symbol confirmation command has been received (step S111: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets a variation effect end command for instructing the end of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol in the sub RAM 133 (step S112).

  This variation effect end command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thereby, the fluctuating effect started in accordance with the process of step S108 is finished, and the decorative symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S109 or determines that the change start command is not received (step S105: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes the following process related to the special game. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 32, the sub CPU 131 determines whether an opening command has been received from the game control board 100 (step S114).

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the opening command has been received (step S114: YES), the sub CPU 131 analyzes the opening command (step S115). Specifically, based on information included in the opening command, a process of determining whether the opening performed this time is related to a long hit game or a short hit game is performed.

  Based on the analysis result of step S115, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the current opening is related to a long hit game (step S116). Here, when it is determined that the game pertains to a long hit game (see FIGS. 26A and 26C) (step S116: YES), an effect pattern of an opening effect performed during the opening is selected (step S117). Then, an opening effect start command for instructing execution of the opening effect of the selected effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S118).

  This opening effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process of step S13. As a result, an opening effect including an effect of notifying that the long hit game is started and an effect of prompting a right strike are performed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, an effect using the latest song performed in the music performance effect is performed as the opening effect. Specifically, for example, when the performance performance of the new song A has already been performed but the performance performance of the new song B has not yet been performed, a part of the video of the new song A reproduced in the performance performance is used. Opening performance is performed. Further, for example, when the performance performance of the new song D has already been performed but the performance performance of the new song E has not yet been performed, the opening performance using a part of the video of the new song D reproduced in the performance performance of the song is performed. Done.

  In this way, since the opening effect is configured based on the video of the new song played in the music performance effect performed independently of the normal performance, the player can perform the opening effect every time the first music performance effect is performed. You can enjoy watching the content change. The processing performed by the image sound control board 140 in order to realize such a change in opening effect will be described in detail later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the current opening does not relate to the long win game (step S116: NO), that is, relates to the short win game (see FIG. 26B), An effect pattern of a short win effect performed between the opening and the end of the ending is selected (step S119), and a short hit effect start command for instructing execution of the short hit effect of the selected effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S119). S120).

  The short hit effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process in step S13, and a short hit effect including an effect for prompting a right-handed strike is performed.

  As for the short win effect, as with the long hit game opening effect, each time the first music performance effect is performed, the effect is switched so as to use the video corresponding to the latest song, in order to realize this The processing performed on the image sound control board 140 will also be described in detail later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the opening command has not been received (step S114: NO), when the process of step S118 is executed, or when the process of step S120 is executed, the game control is performed at the start of the long open round game. It is determined whether or not a round start command transmitted from the substrate 100 has been received (step S122).

When determining that the round start command has not been received (step S122: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether a round end command has been received (step S122-1).
When it is determined that a round end command has been received (step S122-1: YES), an in-round effect end command is set (step S122-2).
On the other hand, if it is determined that a round start command has been received (step S122: YES), the received round start command is analyzed (step S123), and the current long-open round game is a game per 15R length based on the analysis result. It is determined whether or not it is the first long-opening round game (2R in FIG. 26C) (step S124).

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that it is the first long open round game (step S124: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets a music selection screen display command for instructing the image sound control board 140 to display a music selection screen in the sub RAM 133. (Step S125). Here, the music selection screen is a screen that displays the music to be played during the period from the start of the 3R of the long hit game to the start of the ending effect, and the player operates the effect key 27. Thus, a desired new song can be selected. The music selection screen display command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13, and thereby the music selection screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S125 or determines that it is not the first long open round game (step S124: NO), the round start command received this time is the next long open round game (FIG. 26). It is determined whether or not to notify the start of 3R) in (C) (step S126). Here, when it is determined that the round start command notifies the start of the next long open round game (step S126: YES), the player operates the effect key 27 during the first long open round game. A music playback command for instructing to start playback of the selected music is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S127).

  This music reproduction command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thereby, the music selected by the player is played from the third round of the game per 15R length.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S127 or determines that it is not the next long open round game (step S126: NO), the number of continuations of the special game (number of consecutive changs) or the round start command received this time The number of rounds corresponding to is determined and an effect pattern during the round is selected (step S128), and an in-round effect start command for instructing the image sound control board 140 to execute the effect during the round of the selected effect pattern is sent to the sub-RAM 133. Set (step S129). As a result, the display indicating the current number of rounds displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is updated.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the round end command has not been received (step S122-1: NO), when the process of step S122-2 is executed, or when the process of step S129 is executed, As exemplified by 33, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the game control board 100 (step S131). Here, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (step S131: YES), the received ending command is analyzed (step S132), and it is determined whether or not the ending is related to the end of the long hit game ( Step S133). Here, when it is determined that the game pertains to a long hit game (step S133: YES), an effect pattern for the ending effect is selected (step S134), and an ending for instructing execution of the ending effect of the selected effect pattern. An effect start command is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S135).

  This ending effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thus, as will be described in detail later, an ending effect using the same music image as the music used in the opening effect is performed.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the ending is not related to the long hit game (step S133: NO), that is, if the ending is related to the short hit game, the short CPU started in accordance with the process of step S120 above. A short hit effect end command for instructing the end of the hit effect is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S136).

  This short win effect end command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13. As a result, the short win effect ends after the ending time has elapsed.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that an ending command has not been received (step S131: NO), when the process of step S135 is executed, or when the process of step S136 is executed, a waiting-for-customer command is issued from the game control board 100. It is determined whether or not it has been received (step S138). Here, when it is determined that the customer waiting command has been received (step S138: YES), the measurement of the elapsed time since reception of the customer waiting command is started (step S139), and the measurement flag stored in the sub RAM 133 is received. Is set to “ON” (step S140). This measurement flag is a flag indicating whether or not the elapsed time since reception of the customer waiting command is being measured. When the sub CPU 131 receives the customer waiting command, the sub CPU 131 sets a customer waiting command to the general CPU 141 indicating that the customer is waiting.

  When it is determined that the customer waiting command has not been received (step S138: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the measurement flag is set to “ON” (step S141). Here, when it is determined that the measurement flag is not set to “ON” (step S141: NO), a series of command reception processing ends, and the processing proceeds to step S11.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the measurement flag is set to “ON” (step S141: YES), or when the process of step S140 is executed, the customer waiting determination time for defining the start timing of the customer waiting effect is determined. It is determined whether or not the time has elapsed (step S142). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time when measurement is started in the process of step S139 has reached a customer waiting determination time (for example, 30 seconds) stored in the sub ROM 132. If it is determined that the customer waiting determination time has not elapsed (step S142: NO), the process proceeds to step S11.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the customer waiting determination time has elapsed (step S142: YES), the measurement flag is set to “OFF” (step S143), the elapsed time is reset (step S144), and the customer waiting effect is displayed. A customer waiting effect start command for instructing the start is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S145).

  This customer waiting effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thereby, a predetermined demonstration screen display waiting for the customer is started.

  In the command reception process of FIGS. 31 to 33, although not shown, when any one of the above-mentioned illegal prize error 1 command to illegal prize error 4 command is received, each illegal prize is received. Corresponding to the error command, the illegal prize display 1 command, the illegal prize display 2 command, the illegal prize display 3 command, or the illegal prize display 4 command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process. Further, an error light emission command is transmitted to the lamp control board 150, and the CPU of the lamp control board 150 that has received this error light emission command executes error light emission control according to this command.

[Volume Initial Value Setting Process by Production Control Board 130]
With reference to FIG. 34, the sound volume initial value setting process executed in the effect control board 130 will be described. Here, FIG. 34 is a detailed flowchart of the volume initial value setting process in step S11 of FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 131 confirms the value of the volume switch 135 (step S151). Specifically, the ON / OFF status of the input port (2 ports) of the sub CPU 131 is confirmed. When it is 00, “setting 1”, when it is 01, “setting 2”, when it is 10, “setting” If it is 3 ”or 11, it is determined that the switch is located at a position corresponding to“ setting 4 ”.

Next, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the value of the volume switch 135 is “setting 1” (step S153). If it is determined that it is “setting 1” (step S153: YES), a volume initial value 1 command for setting the image acoustic control board 140 to “1” as the volume initial value is set (step S154).
After this processing, in the command transmission processing in step S14 described above, a volume initial value command for instructing that the volume initial value is “1” is transmitted to the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140.
When the process of step S154 is finished, the volume initial value setting process is finished.

When determining that the value of the volume switch 135 is not “setting 1” (step S153: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the value of the volume switch 135 is “setting 2” (step S155). If it is determined that the setting is “setting 2” (step S155: YES), a volume initial value command for setting the image sound control board 140 to “5” as the volume initial value is set (step S156).
After this process, in the command transmission process of step S14 described above, a volume initial value command that indicates that the volume initial value is “5” is transmitted to the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140.
When the process of step S156 is finished, the volume initial value setting process is finished.

If it is determined that the value of the volume switch 135 is not “setting 2” (step S155: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the value of the volume switch 135 is “setting 3” (step S157). If it is determined that it is “setting 3” (step S157: YES), a volume initial value 10 command for setting the image sound control board 140 to “10” as the volume initial value is set (step S158).
After this process, in the command transmission process of step S14 described above, a volume initial value command that indicates that the volume initial value is “10” is transmitted to the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140.
When the process of step S158 is finished, the volume initial value setting process is finished.

  If it is determined that the value of the volume switch 135 is not “setting 3” (step S157: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the value of the volume switch 135 is “setting 4” (step S159). If it is determined that it is “setting 4” (step S159: YES), a volume initial value 5 command for setting the image sound control board 140 to “10” as the volume initial value is set (step S160).

Next, the sub CPU 131 validates the eco mode setting (step S161). When the eco mode setting is enabled, the power saving function described above is enabled, and the sub CPU 131 does not receive any command from the main CPU 101 for 120 seconds after transmitting the customer waiting effect start command. Alternatively, when the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is not detected, a power saving mode transition command for shifting the power consumption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the normal power mode to the power saving mode for saving power is displayed as an image. It is possible to transmit to the central CPU 141 of the sound control board 140 and the CPU of the lamp control board 150.
When the process of step S156 is finished, the volume initial value setting process is finished.

[Configuration Example of Control ROM 144]
FIG. 35 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the control ROM 144. As shown in FIG. 35, in addition to the program executed by the overall CPU 141, the control ROM 144 stores a performance management table, a music performance performance order management table, a display list creation table, and a priority management table. .

  The performance management table is a table that defines the date and time for each new song to be shifted to a state in which execution of the first performance performance of the new song is permitted. The performance management table will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  The music performance performance order management table is a table that is referred to in order to perform the music performance performance while switching the music every hour after completion of the music performance performance of all new songs performed weekly. The music performance performance order management table will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. In the following description, the state in which this music performance performance order management table is used is referred to as “all songs open state”.

  The display list creation table is an effect pattern table used for processing to determine an effect pattern of effects to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6. The process of determining the effect pattern here determines what kind of image data is actually used to realize the effect when the effect of the effect content determined on the effect control board 130 is executed. It is processing.

  The display list creation table is a table used to create a display list stored in the display list storage area 1491. The display list creation table is mainly used for normal effects performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6. It is referred to to control the announcement effect performed using. In this embodiment, the display list creation table is a default table, a new song A main table, a new song B main table, a new song C main table, a new song D main table, a new song E main table, a new song F main table, a new song G main table, A new song H main table, a new song I main table, a new song J main table, a new song K main table, a new song L main table, and a performance table during performance.

  The default table is a table used before the initial performance performance of the new song A is performed. The new song A main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song B is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song A is performed. The new song B main table is a table that is used after the first song performance effect of the new song B is performed until the first song performance effect of the new song C is performed. The new song C main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song D is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song C is performed. The new song E main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song F is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song E is performed. The new song F main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song G is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song F is performed. The new song G main table is a table that is used until the first song performance effect of the new song H is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song G is performed. The new song H main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song I is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song H is performed. The new song I main table is a table that is used from when the first song performance effect of the new song I is performed until the first song performance effect of the new song J is performed. The new song J main table is a table that is used until the first song performance effect of the new song K is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song J is performed. The new song K main table is a table that is used after the first song performance effect of the new song K is performed until the first song performance effect of the new song L is performed. The new song L main table is a table used for one week from when the first song performance performance of the new song L is performed until all songs are released. Thus, the new song A main table to the new song L main table are tables that are used for a predetermined week. In the all-music release state, a normal performance is performed while switching these display list creation tables every hour.

  The performance table during performance is a table used when performing a variation effect, a hold icon display, etc. on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 during the performance start standby effect, during the music performance effect, or during the next performance announcement effect. is there.

  The overall CPU 141 creates a display list using any of the 14 tables constituting the performance management table and the display list creation table before all songs are released. In the state where all songs are released, a display list is created using either the music performance performance order management table or the 14 tables. A method for creating such a display list will be described in detail later.

The priority management table shown in FIG. 35 sets priorities for various effects (or various displays) executed in the special performance mode (mode in which the performance before the performance starts, the performance of the music performance, or the performance after the performance ends). By doing so, the effect (or display) with the highest priority is executed with priority over other effects or notifications, so that the player (in some cases, the game hall staff) It is a table used in order to preferentially execute an effect (or display) that seems to be optimal at the time.
This priority management table includes the image output control process described later in FIG. 66, the sound output control process described later in FIG. 67, the light emission control process of various light emitting elements by the CPU of the lamp control board 150, and the upper movable device 8a or the lower part. It is used in the operation control process of the movable device 8b.
Since the CPU of the lamp control board 150 is not directly connected to the overall CPU 141, the sub CPU 131 that transmits the data indicating the priority through the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 and receives the data indicating the priority is used. The data indicating the priority is transmitted to the CPU of the lamp control board 150 by a data transmission process different from the command transmission process in step S13.

This priority management table is composed of eight layers from the first layer, which is the lowest layer with the lowest priority, to the eighth layer, which is the highest layer with the highest priority. It is a table in which effects or displays belonging to each layer are defined in association with each other.
Basically, the priority is defined based on an effect or display that the player (in some cases, a game hall staff member) is most interested in at that time.

  Here, the priority output processing of an image based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer defined in the priority management table will be described. As an image output control process executed based on the priority management table, there is an image output control pattern shown below. This process corresponds to priority determination means.

  First, in the case where the time for displaying an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to one layer and an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, An image output control pattern 1 for performing image output control only on an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to a layer having the highest priority.

  Next, in the case where the time for displaying the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to one layer and the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, An image related to an effect (or display) belonging to the highest priority layer is displayed prominently when viewed from the player (in some cases, a game hall staff), and an effect belonging to a layer other than the highest priority layer An image output control pattern 2 for performing image output control with a simplified image for an image related to (or display).

  And when the time which displays the image concerning the production (or display) belonging to one layer and the image concerning the production (or display) belonging to the other (one or more) layers overlaps, An image related to an effect (or display) belonging to the layer with the highest priority is displayed conspicuously when viewed from the player (in some cases a game hall staff), and an effect belonging to a layer other than the layer with the highest priority ( Or an output control pattern 3 for performing output control with a reduced image or a simplified image by displaying only a minimum image.

Therefore, in the case where an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to one layer and an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, each selected layer By comparing the priorities of the images, the image related to the production (or display) belonging to the layer with the highest priority among them is displayed conspicuously from the player, while belonging to the layer with the lower priority There are cases where the image related to the effect (or display) is not displayed at all (image output control pattern 1), and the case where the image is displayed as a simplified image (image output control patterns 2 and 3).
Note that the simplified image and the simplified image by displaying only the reduced image or the minimum image correspond to the second mode, and modes other than the second mode correspond to the first mode.

The priority management table shown in FIG. 35 has the effect (or display) contents belonging to the first layer,
[1] Customer waiting effect [2] There is a variable effect stop display when the number of reserved memories is 0, and both the image related to [1] and the image related to [2] are basically effects belonging to the upper layer (Or display) is set to a non-display state (image output control pattern 1). However, when an image related to [2] overlaps with an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to a later-described fourth layer (special effect), it is displayed as a simplified image by the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (image output). Control pattern 2). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the second layer,
[1] There is a menu screen display in the normal effect mode, and an image (control pattern 1) that is in a non-display state by an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to the higher layer is an effect (or a fourth layer described later) (or The menu screen image in the case where it overlaps with the image related to (display) (special effect image) may be a higher layer than the image related to effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer (special effect image) under a predetermined condition. is there. This case will be described later.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the third layer,
[1] Fluctuation effect that starts changing after the start of the special effect, hold icon display at that time, and icon display during change Is displayed as a simplified image on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (image output control pattern 2) when overlapping with an image (special effect image) relating to an effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer described later. At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.
When the image related to [2] overlaps with the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer described later, it is a simplified image with an image of the minimum information (round number image). Displayed (image output control pattern 3). At this time, the image output control pattern 1 may be adopted.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the fourth layer,
[1] Performance before the performance starts (Performance start standby performance or countdown performance)
[2] Music performance production [3] Performance after the performance is finished (next performance announcement production is in progress)
The image according to [1] and the images according to [2] and [3] are basically displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5. However, when it overlaps with an image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fifth layer, which will be described later, the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fifth layer is hidden (image output control pattern 1).
Further, when the image overlaps with an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to the sixth layer described later, it is displayed as a simplified image as a reduced image (image output control pattern 3).
In the present embodiment, special effect images (effect image before performance start, music performance effect image, performance end) related to special effects (effect before start performance, effect performance of music performance, effect after performance end) that are effects in these special effect modes. Even if the post-effect image is an effect executed during the special effect mode, the priority is not always set at the highest level.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the fifth layer,
[1] The menu screen display during the special effect mode and when the variable effect is stopped. Even in the same menu screen display, as described above, the normal effect mode is set to the lower second layer while the special effect mode. In the case where the mode is in progress and the change is stopped (the number of stored memories is 0), since it is set to a higher layer than the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer, When the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer overlaps with the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fifth layer, the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer ( The special effect image) is not displayed (image output control pattern 1). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the sixth layer,
[1] Opening effect during jackpot game [2] Round effect including promotion effect during jackpot game [3] Fluctuation effect that starts changing before special effect starts + Hold icon display + Changing icon display The image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the sixth layer is the image (special effect) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer among the images related to the effect (or display) belonging to the lower layer. ) May only overlap with the execution time.
In this case, when the image related to [1] and the image related to [2] overlap, the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer is displayed as a simplified image as a reduced image. (Image output control pattern 3).
In addition, when an image related to [3] overlaps, or when a later-described partition is set for the image related to [3], an image (special effect) related to an effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer after the partition ) Is displayed as a simplified image as a reduced image (image output control pattern 3). On the other hand, if no delimiter is set, the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer until the image display according to [3] is completed. ) Related images (special effects) are not displayed (image output control pattern 1).
The effect (or display) belonging to the sixth layer corresponds to the second effect.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the seventh layer,
[1] Jackpot confirmation effect [2] Jackpot end display in ending effect during jackpot game [3] CI display in ending effect during jackpot game [4] Card return promotion display in ending effect during jackpot game The image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the seventh layer is only executed with the image (special effect) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer among the images related to the effect (or display) belonging to the lower layer. May overlap.
In this case, an image (special effect) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer
Is not displayed until the image display related to the effect (or display) belonging to the seventh layer is completed (image output control pattern 1). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.
The effect (or display) belonging to the seventh layer corresponds to the second effect.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the eighth layer,
[1] There are various error indications due to radio wave detection, magnetic detection, fraudulent winning, etc., and all the images related to the effect (or display) belonging to the eighth layer have the highest priority in the layer, and the effect belonging to the lower layer (or The image related to (display) is not displayed until the image display related to the effect (or display) belonging to the eighth layer ends (image output control pattern 1). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.
Thus, since the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the eighth layer is an image related to various error displays, it belongs to the highest layer.

  In addition to the method of displaying the minimum information image as the simplified image, for example, an image (for example, a background image, various preview images, etc.) thinned out from the game effect image displayed during the normal effect mode (for example, The decorative pattern P12 only) may be displayed as a simplified image.

[Timer interrupt processing by the image sound control board 140]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control board 140. The image acoustic control board 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 36 at regular time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. To do.

  First, the overall CPU 141 executes an RTC information acquisition process of acquiring RTC information from the RTC 134 of the effect control board 130 and storing it in the control RAM 145 (step S2000). The RTC information stored in the control RAM 145 is rewritten with the newly acquired RTC information every time the process of step S2000 is performed.

  Subsequent to the process in step S2000, the overall CPU 141 executes a measurement process for measuring an elapsed time since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (step S2100). The overall CPU 141 starts the performance before the performance start and the performance performance of the music based on the measurement result of step S2100. This measurement process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2100, the overall CPU 141 executes a state control process for determining whether or not the execution of the initial music performance effect of each new song is permitted (step S2200). This state control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2200, the overall CPU 141 executes a volume setting process for setting a volume setting value that is a basic volume value of various sounds output in an audio output control process (step S2900) described later (step S2900). Step S2250). This state control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2250, the overall CPU 141 executes an effect control process before and after the performance for controlling the notification effect performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (step S2300). The performance control process before and after the performance starts will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S2300, the overall CPU 141 uses the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to perform the performance before the performance start (moderator effect, performance start standby effect, countdown effect) performed prior to the music performance effect. The performance control process before the performance start for controlling the performance is executed (step S2400). The performance control process before the performance start will be described in detail later based on FIG. 45 and FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2400, the overall CPU 141 executes a music performance effect start process for starting a music performance effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (step S2500). This music performance effect start processing is performed separately from the game information from the game control board 100 on the main liquid crystal display device 5 that is executing the normal effect (the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol and the hit effect accompanying the special game). This is a process for starting the above-mentioned music performance effect based on the information stored in advance in the control ROM 144. The music performance production start process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2500, the overall CPU 141 executes a game related effect control process for controlling a game related effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (step S2600). This game-related effect control process executes a game-related effect on the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 in accordance with the game controlled by the game control board 100 based on the game information from the game control board 100. It is a process for making it. This game-related effect control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2600, the overall CPU 141 executes a music performance effect end process for ending the music performance effect started in response to the music performance effect start process of step S2500 (step S2700). This music performance effect end processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2700, the overall CPU 141 executes post-performance end effect control processing for controlling the post-performance end effect (next performance announcement effect, DJ effect) executed after the music performance effect ends ( Step S2750). The music performance effect end processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the processing of step S2700, the overall CPU 141 creates a main liquid crystal display list and / or a sub liquid crystal display list based on the results of the processing of steps S2300 to S2700, and sets them in the display list storage area 1491. Image output control processing is executed (step S2800). The image output control process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2800, the overall CPU 141 performs audio output control processing for outputting music, audio, and the like from the speaker 24 so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed in the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Execute (step S2900). This audio output control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to step S2900, the overall CPU 141 executes data transmission control processing (step S3000). Specifically, data related to image sound control performed on the image sound control board 140 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150. Thereby, the frame lamp 25, the upper movable device 8a, and the lower movable device 8b are controlled so as to synchronize with the effects performed by the main liquid crystal display device 5, the sub liquid crystal display device 6, and the speaker 24. .

[Measurement process by image acoustic control board 140]
FIG. 37 is a detailed flowchart of the measurement process in step S2100 of FIG. This measurement process corresponds to time determination means.
Subsequent to the RTC information acquisition process in step S2000, the overall CPU 141 adds “1” to the interrupt processing count N in the image sound control board 140 stored in the control RAM 145 as illustrated in FIG. Update (step S2101). Every time an interrupt process is performed on the image sound control board 140, the process of step S2101 is performed, whereby the elapsed time since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is measured.

  Subsequent to step S2101, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not it is the start time of the performance before the performance start (moderation performance, performance start standby performance, countdown performance) (step S2102). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first set time for determining whether or not a predetermined time before the start time of the music performance effect (2 minutes and 5 seconds before in this embodiment) is 57 minutes and 55 seconds. Therefore, the elapsed time is calculated by multiplying the interrupt processing time interval (33 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the image sound control board 140 by the interrupt processing count N stored in the control RAM 145, and Based on whether or not the calculated elapsed time has reached 57 minutes 55 seconds, it is determined whether or not it is the start time of the performance before the performance start.

In this embodiment, the first set time for determining whether or not it is the start time of the performance before the performance start is set to 57 minutes 55 seconds, but the first set time is not limited to this value. .
For example, the first set time is 56 minutes 30 seconds when the performance before the performance start is performed prior to the start of the performance of the music performance by the new song B described above, for example, prior to the start of the performance performance of the music by the new song D described above. When the stage performance before the performance start is performed, the first set time is 58 minutes and 10 seconds, etc. The value of one set time may be made non-uniform.
Even if the same performance performance is performed, if there are multiple performance patterns for the performance before the start due to the date, day of the week, start time, etc., the length of the performance time for each performance before the performance starts It is good also as a value of the 1st setting time according to the length.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start time of the performance before the performance start (step S2102: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets the pre-performance start flag stored in the control RAM 145 to “ON” (step S2103). This pre-performance start flag is a flag indicating whether or not the start time of the performance before the performance has started. When the start time of the performance before the performance starts, the flag is set to “ON” and the performance of the music performance is started. Set to “OFF”.

  If the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2103 or determines that it is not the start time of the performance before the performance start (step S2102: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not it is the start time of the music performance performance (step). S2104). Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the second set time for determining whether or not it is the start time of the music performance effect is set to 1 hour, the same method as the process of step S2102 is performed. Based on whether or not the calculated elapsed time has reached 1 hour, it is determined whether or not it is the start time of the musical performance performance. Here, when it is determined that it is not the start time of the music performance effect (step S2104: NO), the process proceeds to the state control process of step S2200.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start time of the music performance effect (step S2104: YES), it sets the music performance flag stored in the control RAM 145 to “ON” (step S2105). Here, the music performance flag is a flag indicating whether or not the music performance production start time has come, and is set to “ON” when the music performance production start time is reached, and “OFF” when the music performance production is started. "Is set.

  In this way, the overall CPU 141 has a second set time (1 hour in this embodiment) that defines the elapsed time during measurement and the start timing of the music performance effect, regardless of the various commands transmitted from the game control board 100. The start timing of the performance of the music performance is determined based on whether or not the music performance has been set, and the performance performance effect is started on the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24 by setting the music performance flag to “ON” at the determined start timing. Let The music performance production start control process for starting the music performance production will be described in detail later.

  Subsequent to step S2105, the overall CPU 141 resets the interrupt processing count N stored in the control RAM 145 (step S2106). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the elapsed time measured by repeating the processing of step S2101 reaches 1 hour, the elapsed time is measured again after the interrupt processing count N is returned to “0”. . For this reason, a musical performance performance is performed every hour.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the second set time is set to 1 hour has been described, but the second set time may be a time other than 1 hour. Further, the second setting time is not necessarily one, and for example, different second setting times may be set according to the type of new song used for the music performance performance. By adopting this configuration, the time interval at which the music performance performance is performed can be made different for each new song. In this case, the value of the first set time is appropriately set according to the value of the second set time.

  Subsequent to step S2106, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not all songs are released (step S2107). Specifically, all songs will be released on February 22, 2014, one week after February 15, 2014 (see FIG. 38), when the first song performance of the new song L will be performed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the current date indicated by the RTC information acquired from the RTC 134 is a date after February 22, which is the start date of the transition to the all songs release state. Here, when it is determined that the state is not the all-music release state (step S2107: NO), the process proceeds to the state control process of step S2200.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are released (step S2107: YES), the overall CPU 141 updates the reset processing count P stored in the control RAM 145 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S2108). The reset processing count P indicates the number of times the reset processing in step S2106 has been performed. In the present embodiment, since the process of step S2106 is performed every time one hour has elapsed with respect to the time when the power is turned on, the reset process count P is equal to the pachinko gaming machine at the timing when the reset process count P is updated. 1 is the same as the elapsed time from the power-on. For this reason, for example, if the reset processing count P is “1”, it can be determined that one hour has elapsed since the power was turned on, and if it is “2”, it can be determined that two hours have elapsed. . The number P of reset processes is used in the music performance effect start process in step S2500 in order to determine the type of new music used for the music performance effect that starts every hour in the state where all songs are released.

[Performance management table]
FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the performance management table. As illustrated in FIG. 38, in the performance management table, the new song type indicating the type of new song, the first announcement date that is the date of performing the first song performance, and the first song performance of the new song corresponding to the first announcement date. An initial announcement permission time that is a time to shift to a state in which the execution of the effect is permitted is stored in association with each new song.

  For example, for the new song A, at 12:00 (noon) on November 30, 2013, the internal state related to the music performance production is shifted to the music performance production permission state, and then the first music performance production of the new song A is started. Is stipulated. Also, for example, for new song B, at 12 o'clock (noon) on December 7, 2013, the internal state related to the song performance production is shifted to the song performance production permission state, and then the first song performance production of the new song B is started. It is stipulated that In the present embodiment, the music performance flag is set to “ON” every hour based on the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the performance performance permission state of the new music A is on November 30, 2013 For 1 week from 12 o'clock to 12 o'clock on December 7 in the same year, when the performance performance of new song B is permitted, the performance performance of new song A will be repeated every hour on the basis of power-on. . This is the same for the new songs B to L, except that the periods in which the music performance effect is permitted differ.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, when the first music performance effect is performed, is a normal effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 and an effect before the performance starts, It has the feature that the production content of the production changes after the performance ends.

  For example, when the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, the content of the performance of each performance changes as follows. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 38, only the default background image appeared as the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 until the initial performance performance of the new song A was performed. After the first music performance effect is performed, a new song A background image created using image data related to the new song A appears. The same applies to new songs after the new song B.

  Also, in the opening of the long hit game, the default opening production was performed until the first song performance production of the new song A. The first song performance of the new song B after the first song performance production of the new song A was performed. Until the performance performance is performed, an opening performance using image data and sound data related to the new song A is performed. The same applies to the ending effect of the long hit game. In this way, the opening effect and the ending effect in the long hit game are fixed to those based on the new song used for the current song performance effect until the first song performance effect of the next new song to be performed is performed. . That is, for example, from the time when the first song performance effect of the new song C is performed to the time when the first song performance effect of the new song D is performed, the opening effect and the ending effect of the new song C specification are performed.

  In addition, in the selection of the music to be played in the 15R long game, only the default music can be selected until the first music performance performance of the new music A, but the first music performance performance of the new music A is performed. After that, the new song A can be selected. The same applies to new songs after the new song B, and every time the first song performance effect is performed, new songs that can be selected by the player in the song selection increase. For this reason, for example, the first song performance of the new song L is only three songs, the default song, the new song A, and the new song B, which can be selected for one week after the first song performance performance of the new song B is performed. After the performance is performed, it is possible to select a default music piece and 13 pieces of music pieces including all new pieces of new pieces A to L.

  Also, the performance before the start of the performance of the first song performance of the new song A was not performed, but the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the first song performance production of the new song B until the start of the first song performance production of the new song B. In the sub liquid crystal display device 6, the performance before the performance of the new song A (for example, FIGS. 6B to 6D) is executed prior to the performance of the music performance each time the performance of the new song A is performed. The same applies to new songs after the new song G. When the performance of the music performance is performed, the performance before the performance start corresponding to the new music used for the performance of the music performance is performed. After the performance of the music performance, the performance after the performance corresponding to the performance of the music performance performed this time is performed.

  In addition, the performance of the new song A is performed every other hour for one week after the first performance of the new song A is performed, and the performance of the new song B is performed when one week elapses. Therefore, during the period from when the first song performance effect of the new song A is performed until when the first song performance effect of the new song B is performed, the song performance effect of the new song A ends on the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Later, a performance after the performance related to the new song A (for example, see FIGS. 6F and 6G) is performed. The same applies to new songs after the new song B.

  Up to this point, how the production changes with the first music performance production has been briefly described. However, in the present embodiment, the change in the production is a display list creation table (used to create a display list) ( This is realized by switching (see FIG. 35).

  In the present embodiment, a case is described in which the intervals from the first performance performance date to the first new performance performance date of the next new song are all set to one week, but this interval is an interval other than one week. Alternatively, a plurality of types of intervals may be set. Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where the first music performance production permission time is unified about 12:00 regarding all the new music, you may set different first music performance performance permission time for every new music. Further, the order of the performance of the new music may be the order of performance other than the order of the performance of the music illustrated in the performance management table.

  On November 30, 2013, the musical performance performance (new song A) is in a musical performance performance permission state, and on December 7, 2013, the musical performance performance (new song B) is in a musical performance performance permission state. In addition, since the contents of the special performance differ depending on the week, it is difficult to get the player bored.

[State Control Processing by Image Sound Control Board 140]
FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the state control process in step S2200 of FIG. Subsequent to the measurement process in step S2100, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not all songs are in the open state, similar to the process in step S2107 (step S2201). Here, when it is determined that all songs are in an open state (step S2201: YES), the process proceeds to the performance control process before and after the performance in step S2300.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are not open (step S2201: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the current date is the first performance performance date (step S2202). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current date indicated by the RTC information coincides with any of the initial performance performance dates of the new songs A to L defined in the performance management table. Here, if it is determined that it is not the first performance performance date (step S2202: NO), that is, if it is not the first performance performance date of any new song, the process proceeds to the performance control processing before the performance start in step S2300. .

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the first music performance effect date (step S2202: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the current time is the first music performance effect permitted time (step S2203). Specifically, the first musical performance performance permission time corresponding to the current date corresponding to the first musical performance performance date of any new song is read from the performance management table, and the current time indicated by the RTC information is read. It is determined whether or not the production permission time has come. In the present embodiment, since the first music performance performance permission time is set to 12:00 for all new songs, it is determined in this step S2203 whether or not the time indicated by the RTC information has reached 12:00. It will be. If it is determined in step S2203 that the first music performance performance permission time has not come (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to the performance control process before the performance start in step S2300.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the first musical performance performance permission time has come (step S2203: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets the musical performance performance permission flag stored in the control RAM 145 to “ON” (step S2204). This music performance directing permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not the music performance directing permission state is set to permit execution of the first music performance directing of the new music to be performed next to the new music currently being performed. It is set to “ON” when the first music performance production permission time of any of the first music performance production dates specified in the table is reached, and “OFF” when the music performance production is started with “ON” set. "Is set.

[Music performance performance permission status]
FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a musical performance performance permission state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the elapsed time is measured with reference to the time when the power is turned on. Therefore, assuming that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on around 8:00 am and the pachinko hall opens at 10:00 am, for example, the first song performance production date for the first song performance of the new song A is July 7th. In step S2106 (see FIG. 37), the number of reset processes is counted, and the first song performance of the new song A is triggered when the counted number reaches “4” (4 hours have passed since the power was turned on). By adopting a configuration in which the production is started, it is possible to perform the first musical performance performance of the new song A around 12:00 (noon) (see FIG. 40A).

  However, this configuration causes the following problems. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 40B, when the hall clerk turns on the power at about 5 am, the first song of the new song A at about 9 am before 10 am when the pachinko hall opens. As a result, there is a problem that the player cannot enjoy the first music performance performance of the new song A, which is a trigger for newly appearing various effects related to the new song A. In addition, the same problem may occur when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is still turned on from the day before the first performance performance date.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the music performance effect permission flag is set to “ON” on condition that the current time indicated by the RTC information is a preset time (first music performance effect permission time), and the music performance effect is set. On the condition that the music performance flag is set to “ON” while the permission flag is set to “ON”, the first performance performance is performed, while the music performance flag is set to “OFF”. When “ON” is set to “ON”, the first music performance effect is not executed (if there is a new song that has already been performed, the music performance effect of the new song is executed).

  With this configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 40C, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on at about 5 am, which is different from the assumption, about 12:00 (exactly after 12:00) When the music performance flag is “ON” for the first time, the first music performance effect of the new music A can be started. In addition, control of such a music performance directing permission state is performed similarly about new music other than the new music A.

[Music performance stage management table]
FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram for describing a music performance performance order management table. The music performance performance order management table is a table for managing the type of new music used for the music performance performance in the open state of all music. In the musical performance performance order management table, as illustrated in FIG. 41, the elapsed time from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the musical performance performance with respect to each date after 2/22, which is the first day of the release state of all songs. Is associated with the type of new song used. In the present embodiment, a case where the music performance presentation order management table is configured assuming that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on around 8:00 am will be described as an example.

  When all songs are released, the period during which the performance of each song is performed is shortened from one week to one hour. As a result, the performance performances of the new songs A to L performed over 84 days (= 1 week × 12 songs) before the entire song is released are performed in one day.

  For example, if the power is turned on at around 8 am on February 22, the performance of the new song A will be performed at about 10 am 2 hours later, and the new song B will be produced at 11 am 3 hours later. A musical performance performance is performed, and a musical performance performance of the new song C is performed around 12:00 four hours later. Then, the performance of the new song J will be performed at around 19:00, 11 hours later, the performance of the new song K will be performed at around 20:00, 12 hours later, and the song of the new song L will be performed at 21:00, 13 hours later. Performance performance will be performed.

  By the way, after February 23, if the performance of the music performance is performed on the same schedule as February 22, no matter what day the player plays, the game continues from the opening to closing of the pachinko hall. If so, you can enjoy the performance performance of all new songs. However, some players can only play during a specific time period. On the other hand, if you perform music performances with the same schedule as described above, even if you continue to play every day, The problem arises that it is not possible to enjoy the performance performance of all new songs. For example, on February 22, if a player starts playing at about 18:00, he can enjoy the performances of the new songs I to L, but cannot enjoy the performances of the new songs A to H. .

  For this reason, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 41, the song order of the new song is defined in advance so that the song order of the new song used for the performance of the song is shifted regularly one by one. Yes. For this reason, for example, the performance performance of the new song A and the new song B, which could only be enjoyed in the morning of February 22, will be performed after 18:00 on February 24. For this reason, even a player who can play only during a specific time period as described above can enjoy the performance performance of all new songs by continuing to go to the pachinko hall to some extent. The control of the music performance effect in such a state where all songs are released will be described in detail later based on FIG.

As described above with reference to FIG. 41, when the entire song is released on 2/22, the new song performed in the song performance production is changed every time based on the song performance production order management table. . Therefore, the special performance is changed every time.
In addition, in the music performance production order management table, the content of the new song is changed every time the performance of the music performance production is performed, but this is not limiting, for example, 2/22 performs the music performance production of the new song A every time, On 2/23, the performance performance of the new song B is performed every time, and the content of the performance of the performance performance may be changed daily. In addition, in 2/22, a new song A flows every time during the performance of the music performance, but the image of the new music A is changed only in a part of the performance performance of the music performance such as A-1, A-2. May be. Further, although the new song is changed every time, the image of the new song A may be displayed every time.

  Also, on 2/22, the first music performance production starts with the new song A, and the last music performance production ends with the new music L. On 2/23, the first music performance production starts with the new music B, and the last music performance production. Even if all songs are released, such as ending with a new song A, the contents (schedule) of special effects differ depending on the date, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

  In addition, when all songs are released, the next performance announcement performance is performed for 5 seconds as part of the performance performance after the performance performance is finished and then the next performance performance (1 hour later) is announced. Become so. Therefore, the player can recognize the contents of the performance of the next music performance effect after the end of the current music performance effect.

[Volume setting processing by image acoustic control board 140]
42 and 43 are detailed flowcharts of the volume setting process in step S2250 of FIG. The volume setting process is a process for setting a basic volume value of an output volume such as various sounds output in an audio output control process described later.
In addition, in this volume setting process, the output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value can be reduced to 40% during a special production (production before the performance start, music performance production, production after the performance), when the operation is not performed. At the start of processing to reduce and special production (production before performance start, music performance production, production after performance) start, the output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value is reduced to 40% when it becomes inactive And a process for reducing the output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value to 40% in the power saving mode.

  First, the overall CPU 141 determines whether any volume initial value command has been received from the sub CPU 131 (step S2251). If the overall CPU 141 determines that any volume initial value command has been received from the sub CPU 131 (step S2251: YES), the volume initial value corresponding to the volume initial value command that has received the volume setting value is set as the current volume setting value. Set. When this process ends, the process proceeds to the effect control process before and after the performance start in step S2300.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that any volume initial value command has not been received from the sub CPU 131 (step S2251: NO), it is determined whether or not the volume adjustment valid period during which the player can adjust the volume is currently in effect. A determination is made (step S2253).

Here, the volume adjustment effective period will be described. The overall CPU 141 informs the player that the volume can be adjusted now by displaying the volume adjustment gauge image while the change effect is stopped or the customer waiting effect when the number of reserved memories is 0. .
In this volume gauge image, a 10-level memory image (black image) and a mark image (green image) indicating how many levels of the current volume setting value are in 10 levels are displayed over the memory image. At the same time, the current volume setting value is displayed as a numerical image (green image) on the right side of the memory image.

  The initial value display by the mark image in the volume adjustment gauge image is changed according to the setting by the volume switch 135 described above, and when the setting by the volume switch 135 is setting 1 (output volume “low”). The initial value display is in one stage. When setting 2 (output volume is “medium”), the initial value display is five levels, and when setting 3 (output volume is “high”) or setting 4 (“eco mode”), the initial value is displayed. The value display has 10 levels.

While the volume adjustment gauge is displayed, the player can adjust the volume desired by the player by operating the left key or the right key of the effect keys 27. The period during which the volume adjustment gauge is displayed is the volume adjustment effective period.
The volume adjustment gauge may be displayed when the player operates either the left key or the right key while the variation effect is stopped or the customer waiting effect.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not during the volume adjustment valid period (step S2253: NO), it moves the process to step S2264. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume adjustment is valid (step S2253: YES), it is determined whether or not the right key of the effect keys 27 has been operated (step S2254). If it is determined that the right key of the effect keys 27 has been operated (step S2254: YES), it is determined whether or not the current volume setting value is 10, which is the maximum value (step S2255). If it is determined that the current sound volume setting value is 10 (step S2255: YES), the process proceeds to the performance control process before and after the performance start in step S2300.

When determining that the current volume setting value is not 10 (step S2255: NO), the overall CPU 141 increases the output volume level by one level from the current volume setting value (step S2256). Subsequently, the overall CPU 141 outputs a confirmation sound at an output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value obtained by raising the output volume level by one level (step S2257).
Thus, each time the output volume is increased by one level, a confirmation sound is output with the output volume increased by one level. Therefore, the player increases the volume to a desired level while checking the volume level after the change. Adjustments can be made. When this process ends, the process proceeds to the effect control process before and after the performance start in step S2300.

  If it is determined that the right key of the effect keys 27 is not operated (step S2254: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the left key of the effect keys 27 is operated (step S2258). If it is determined that the left key of the effect keys 27 has been operated (step S2258: YES), it is determined whether or not the current volume setting value is 1, which is the minimum value (step S2259). If it is determined that the current volume setting value is 1 (step S2259: YES), the process proceeds to the performance control process before and after the performance start in step S2300.

If it is determined that the current volume setting value is not 1 (step S2259: NO), the overall CPU 141 lowers the output volume level by one level from the current volume setting value (step S2260). Subsequently, the overall CPU 141 outputs a confirmation sound with an output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value obtained by lowering the output volume level by one step (step S2261).
Thus, every time the output volume is lowered by one step, a confirmation sound is output by the output volume that has been lowered by one step, so that the player lowers the volume to the desired level while checking the volume level after the change. Adjustments can be made. When this process ends, the process proceeds to the effect control process before and after the performance start in step S2300.

  If it is determined that the volume adjustment is not valid (step S2253: NO) or that the left key of the production key 27 is not operated (step S2258: YES), the general CPU 141 performs a special production (production before performance start, music performance). It is determined whether or not it is time to start production and production after the performance) (step S2262). Specifically, it is the time (57 minutes and 55 seconds in this embodiment) when the performance before the performance start (moderation performance, performance start standby performance, countdown performance) that is performed prior to the music performance performance as a special performance is started. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is determined that it is not time to start the special effect (step S2262: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the special effect is currently being executed (step S2263). Specifically, whether the performance before the performance start (moderation performance, performance start standby performance, countdown performance), music performance performance, or performance after the performance ends (next performance announcement performance, DJ performance) is being executed? It is determined whether or not (step S2263).

If it is determined that the special effect is not currently being executed (step S2263: NO), it is determined whether or not the power saving mode transition state is based on the power saving mode transition command received from the sub CPU 131 (step S2264). When determining that it is not in the power saving mode transition state (normal power state) (step S2264: NO), the overall CPU 141 sets the set volume setting value as the current volume setting value (step S2265).
Therefore, when the power saving mode transition state is shifted to the normal power mode before the process of step S2265, the output volume that has been lowered to 40% by the power saving function by the process of step S2265 corresponds to the volume setting value. Return to the output volume (100%). That is, the output sound volume is set according to the sound volume setting value that was set before shifting to the power saving mode. When this process ends, the process proceeds to the effect control process before and after the performance start in step S2300.
In this process, when the output sound volume (100%) corresponding to the sound volume setting value is restored, the sound volume may be gradually restored from 40% to 100% so as to fade from fade-out. . Alternatively, one or a plurality of return timings may be set in advance for the music sound or conversation sound, and may be returned to 100% when the return timing is reached.

When it is determined that it is time to start the special effect (step S2262: YES), or when it is determined that the special effect is currently being executed (step S2263: YES), the overall CPU 141 performs a game-related effect (variation). It is determined whether or not it is an unexecuted state in which an effect or a jackpot effect is not executed (step S2266). The determination as to whether or not it is in the unexecuted state is made based on whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting command was received from the sub CPU 131.
In addition, after receiving the variation effect end command from the sub CPU 131, if the variation effect start command is not received even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that the state is an unexecuted state. Good. The value of the predetermined time is not limited to 30 seconds, and may be appropriately set to 5 seconds or 10 seconds.

  Game-related effects (fluctuation effects, jackpot effects, etc.) are not executed (non-operating state) (a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since receiving a customer waiting command from the sub CPU 131) Is determined (step S2266: YES), or when it is determined that the state is the power saving mode transition state based on the power saving mode transition command received from the sub CPU 131 (or transition to the power saving mode) (step S2264: YES), the output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value is set to an output volume that is reduced to 40% (step S2267).

It is not an unexecuted state (non-operating state) in which game-related effects (fluctuating effects, jackpot effects, etc.) are not executed (operating state or a predetermined time after receiving a customer waiting command from the sub CPU 131 (for example, 30 seconds) (Step S2266: NO), the overall CPU 141 sets the set volume setting value as the current volume setting value (step S2265).
Therefore, before the processing of step S2265, the game-related effect execution state (operation state: (fluctuation effect or jackpot effect) from the game-related effect non-execution state (non-operation state: a state where the variation effect or jackpot effect or the like is not executed). When the output volume is reduced to 40% by the process of step S2265, the output volume is returned to 100%, that is, before the output volume is reduced to 40%. When the process ends, the process proceeds to the effect control process before and after the performance start in step S2300.

Therefore, in this embodiment,
(1) Among the pre-performance performances that are initially executed in the special performance (the performance before the performance start, the performance of the music performance, the performance after the performance is finished), at the time when the moderation performance is executed (step S2262: YES) When it is in the non-executed state (non-operating state) where the effect (variation effect, jackpot effect, etc.) is not executed (step S2266: YES), the output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value is reduced to 40%. The volume is set (step S2267). Therefore, if the output volume when the process of step S2267 is not executed is 100%, the output volume when the process of step S2267 is executed is 40%.
(2) During special effects in which special effects (pre-performance start effects, music performance effects, post-performance effects) are already being executed (step S2263: YES), game-related effects (fluctuation effects, jackpot effects, etc.) are executed. When the unexecuted state (non-operating state) is set (step S2266: YES), the output volume is set to 40% of the output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value (step S2267). Therefore, if the output volume when the process of step S2267 is not executed is 100%, the output volume when the process of step S2267 is executed is 40%.
(3) Of the pre-performance performances to be executed first in the special performance, the time when the moderator effect is executed (step S2262: YES) or during the special performance (step S2263: YES), the game-related effects are not executed After determining that it is (non-operating state) (step S2266: YES) and setting the output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value to 40% (step S2267), the game-related effects When it is determined that it is in the execution state (operation state) (step S2266: NO), the output volume corresponding to the volume setting value that was set before the output volume that had been reduced to 40% was reduced to 40%. (100%) is set (step S2265).
(4) It is determined that the power saving mode has been entered (or the power saving mode has been entered) (step S2264: YES), and the output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value is set to an output volume reduced to 40%. (Step S2264: NO), the output volume that has been reduced to 40% is reduced to 40%. Is set to the output volume (100%) corresponding to the volume setting value set before the recording (step S2265).

Note that the processing in step S2262 may be changed as follows.
In the process of step S2262, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the music performance effect is started (1 hour in the present embodiment) among the special effects (the performance before the performance starts, the performance of the music performance, the performance after the performance ends). You may make it determine.
In the processing of step S2262, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not it is time to start the public start standby effect among the pre-performance start effects (moderator effect, performance start standby effect, countdown effect) in the special effect. You may do it.

Moreover, you may change the process of step S2263 as follows.
In the process of step S2263, the overall CPU 141 may determine whether or not the performance start standby effect to the music performance effect, which is the effect before the performance start in the special effect, is currently being executed.
In the processing of step S2263, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the next performance announcement effect that is the performance after the performance start standby performance to the special performance before the performance start standby performance is being executed. You may make it do.
In the processing of step S2263, the overall CPU 141 may determine whether or not the music performance effect is currently being executed.
In the process of step S2263, the overall CPU 141 may determine whether or not the countdown effect to the music performance effect, which is an effect before the performance start in the special effect, is currently being executed.
In the process of step S2263, the overall CPU 141 may determine whether or not the DJ performance currently being performed after the performance end in the music performance performance to the special performance is being executed.

Further, the processing in step S2266 may be changed as follows.
In the processing of step S2266, the overall CPU 141 immediately becomes an unexecuted state when a game-related effect (fluctuation effect, jackpot effect, etc.) is not executed (when a customer waiting command is received). May be determined, and the process of step S2267 may be executed.
In the processing of step S2266, the overall CPU 141 may determine whether or not a customer waiting effect start command has been received. Then, the overall CPU 141 may execute the process of step S2267 when the customer waiting effect start command is received.

Further, the processing in step S2267 may be changed as follows.
In the process of step S2267, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the game-related effect (variation effect, jackpot effect, etc.) is not executed (non-operating state), the output corresponding to the current volume setting value You may make it set to the output volume (mute) which reduced the volume to 0%.
In the process of step S2267, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the game-related effect (variation effect, jackpot effect, etc.) is not executed (non-operating state), the current volume setting value is the minimum value. In the case of “1”, the output volume is not decreased, and when the current volume setting value is “2” to “10” other than the minimum value, the volume setting value is set to the minimum value “1”. You may do it.
In the process of step S2267, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the game-related effect (variation effect, jackpot effect, etc.) is not being executed (non-operating state), a predetermined stage ( For example, it may be lowered by 5 levels). In this case, if the predetermined level cannot be lowered (minimum value “1”), the volume setting value is set to “1”.

In addition, as described above, when the situation where the output volume is reduced in the special effects (the performance before the performance starts, the performance of the music performance, the performance after the performance ends) occurs, the lamp control board 150 reduces the illuminance of the light emitting element illuminance. The lighting control associated with the decrease in the output volume is not executed, such as turning on some of the light emitting elements and turning off the other light emitting elements.
Further, the overall CPU 141 does not execute control for reducing the illuminance of the backlight for the backlights of the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

[Direction control processing before and after the performance by the image sound control board 140]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the performance control process before and after the performance in step S2300 in FIG. The performance control process before and after the performance start is a process for controlling the performance before the performance start and the performance after the performance end using the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  Subsequent to the volume setting process in step S2250, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the music performance effect is being executed based on the processing status of the VDP 142 as illustrated in FIG. 44 (step S2301). Here, when it is determined that the music performance effect is not being executed (step S2301: NO), the post-performance effect (see FIGS. 6F and 6G) is being executed based on the processing status of the VDP 142. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2302). Here, when it is determined that the next performance announcement effect (see FIG. 6 (F)) or the DJ effect (see FIG. 6 (G)), which is an effect after the performance ends, is being executed (step S2302: YES), Processing proceeds to the performance control process before performance start in step S2400.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the performance is not being executed after the performance is finished (step S2302: NO), for example, based on the interrupt processing count N counted up in the processing of step S2101, the start time of the performance before the performance starts It is determined whether or not (for example, 57 minutes 55 seconds which is the first set time) (step S2303).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the production start time before the performance start (step S2303: YES), the main liquid crystal display device 5 performs the performance before the performance start composed of the current moderator production + the current performance start standby production + the countdown production. Then, setting information for starting the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2304). Based on this setting information, a display list for the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal is created and stored in the display list storage area 1491. Thus, prior to the performance of the music performance (see FIG. 6B) ), A performance start standby effect (see FIG. 6C) and a countdown effect (see FIG. 6D) are displayed.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance effect is being executed (step S2301: YES), for example, based on the processing status of the VDP 142, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the music performance effect has ended (step S2305). If it is determined that the musical performance performance has not ended (step S2305: NO), the process proceeds to the performance control process before the performance start in step S2400.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance effect has ended (step S2305: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not all the songs are in an open state (step S2306). Here, when it is determined that all the songs are not open (step S2306: NO), for example, a new song to be performed next is identified with reference to the song performance production management table, and the first song performance production of the new song is performed. Performances after the performance (see FIG. 6 (F), (G) including the next performance announcement effect (see FIG. 6 (F)) for notifying the remaining days (7 to 1 days regardless of the type of new song in this embodiment). )) Is set in the control RAM 145 for causing the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to execute (step S2307).

Specifically, first, the current date is specified based on the RTC information. Then, with reference to the performance management table (see FIG. 38), the first musical performance performance date that is later than the current date and closest to the current date is specified. The first performance performance date specified in this way is the first performance performance date of the new song to be performed next. For example, if the current date is November 29, 2013, the first performance performance date corresponding to the above-mentioned conditions is November 30, 2013, and it is determined that the next new performance is the new song A. can do. When the general CPU 141 specifies the first musical performance performance date in this way, the overall CPU 141 calculates the number of days from the current date to the identified first musical performance performance date. In the example described here, the number of days “1” is calculated. In this way, the overall CPU 141 acquires the type of new song to be performed next (the name of the song here) and the number of days until the first performance performance of the new song is performed based on the RTC information and the performance management table. To do. And the setting information of the next performance announcement production corresponding to these acquired information is set. Based on this setting information, a display list for the sub liquid crystal is created and stored in the display list storage area 1491 so that the title of the new song to be performed next and the number of days remaining until the first song performance stage date of the new song, Will be notified (see FIG. 6F).
A display list for the sub liquid crystal is created based on the setting information and stored in the display list storage area 1491, so that the next performance announcement effect (see FIG. 6F) and the DJ effect (see FIG. 6G). ) Will be displayed.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are in an open state (step S2306: YES), for example, the music performance presentation management table is identified with reference to the music performance production management table, and the music is produced next time. Setting information for causing the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to execute the post-performance effects including the next performance announcement effect informing that the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 are to be executed. It is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2308). A display list for the sub liquid crystal is created based on the setting information and stored in the display list storage area 1491, so that the next performance announcement effect (see FIG. 6F) and the DJ effect (see FIG. 6G). ) Will be displayed.

[Produce control processing before start of performance by image sound control board 140]
45 and 46 are detailed flowcharts of the performance control process before the performance start in step S2400 of FIG. Following the performance control process before and after the performance start in step S2300, the overall CPU 141 determines whether the pre-performance start flag stored in the control RAM 145 is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S2401). This pre-performance start flag is set to “ON” by performing step S2103 (see FIG. 37) described above. If it is determined that the pre-performance start flag is not set to “ON” (step S2401: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance production start process in step S2500.

  When determining that the pre-performance start flag is set to “ON” (step S2401: YES), the overall CPU 141 specifies a new song to be performed in the music performance effect (step S2402). Specifically, the current date and time (date and time) is specified based on the RTC information, and the start time of the music performance effect that is performed following the performance before the start of the current performance is specified based on the specified current date and time. . More specifically, the current interrupt processing count N is subtracted from the interrupt processing count N when the music performance flag is set to “ON”, and the value obtained by this subtraction is used as the interrupt processing time interval (this implementation In the embodiment, the remaining time until the start time of the musical performance performance is calculated by multiplying by 33 mm). Then, the start time of the music performance effect is specified by adding the remaining time calculated to the specified current date and time. When the general CPU 141 identifies the start time of the music performance effect, the overall CPU 141 identifies a new song used for the music performance effect with reference to the table. In other words, when the current state is not the state of releasing all songs, the performance management table (see FIG. 38) is referred to determine which new song is used at the start time of the specified music performance effect. On the other hand, when the current state is an all-music release state, it is determined which new song is used at the start time of the specified music performance production by referring to the music performance production order management table (see FIG. 41). .

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2402, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for starting the performance before the performance start related to the specified new song in the control RAM 145 (step S2402-1). When the setting information is set, a display list for the main liquid crystal and a display list for the sub liquid crystal are created based on the setting information, and the created display list is stored in the display list storage area 1491. Thereby, the performance before the performance start (see FIGS. 6B to 6D) is started.

  For example, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the special game (during the big hit game) is in progress based on the reception status of a command related to the special game from the effect control board 130 (step S2403). Here, if it is determined that the special game is not being played (the jackpot game is not being played) (step S2403: NO), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting effect is being performed (step S2404). Specifically, since the customer waiting effect is performed after the customer waiting effect start command is received from the effect control board 130 until the variable effect start command is received, for example, the customer waiting effect start command is received. After that, based on whether or not the change production start command is received, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting production is being performed (step S2404).

  By the way, during the customer waiting effect, the normal effect accompanying the game using the game ball is not performed. For this reason, even if the performance before the start of the performance unrelated to the normal performance is performed, there is no risk of impairing the interest of the normal performance. For this reason, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the customer waiting effect is in progress (step S2404: YES), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process in step S2500.

However, as will be described later, when the performance before the performance start (of which the moderator effect) is performed while the waiting for the performance is in progress, the performance is performed with the output volume reduced to 40% of the current volume setting value. The sound of the production before the start is output.
When the volume switch 135 is set to setting 4 (eco mode), the control as described above is performed in the [power saving function].

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not during the customer waiting effect (step S2404: NO), for example, the elapsed time since receiving the change effect start command instructing the start of the normal effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol. Based on, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation display is in progress (step S2407).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the special symbol is being changed (step S2407: YES), the development CPU switching flag stored in the control RAM 145, the prohibition flag, and the start after completion flag are displayed. It is determined whether or not the flag setting process has been completed based on whether or not “ON” is set (step S2408). These three flags will be described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the flag setting process has not been completed (step S2408: NO), that is, if all of the above three flags are set to “OFF”, the current special symbol variation display ends. The remaining time until this is calculated (step S2409). Specifically, for example, the variation time of the special symbol is specified based on the variation effect start command received from the effect control board 130, and the elapsed time from the reception of the variation effect start command to the current time is specified. The remaining time is calculated by subtracting.

By the way, the performance before the performance start in the present embodiment is performed 2 minutes and 5 seconds before the performance of the music performance is started, the moderator effect (15 seconds), the performance start standby effect (1 minute 40 seconds), and the countdown. Since the production is composed of production (10 seconds), the variation production that has started to fluctuate before the performance before the performance starts is finished before the start time of the music performance production. .
In the performance before the performance start, the moderator effect is an effect in which the introduction voice is output from the speaker 24 as described above, and therefore is an effect that does not affect the display of the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6. The performance start standby effect is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 by switching the performance standby image from the change effect and is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 although it is irrelevant to the execution status of the game related effects such as the change effect. It has been directed.
For this reason, if the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol has not ended before the performance start standby effect in the performance before the performance start, the end timing of the current variation effect ends or the next special symbol The change timing of the change effect such as the start timing at which the change effect accompanying the change display is started exists after the start of the performance start standby effect.

  In such a case, as shown in FIGS. 7A-1 to 7A-3, until the end timing or the start timing is reached, the performance standby image by the performance start standby effect is displayed in the main liquid crystal display device 5. When the end timing or the start timing is reached, the display is switched from the reduced display to the display over the entire display screen, and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 displays the variation effect. It is possible to suppress the interest of changing production from being impaired by the performance start standby production.

  For this reason, the overall CPU 141 follows the processing of step S2409 based on whether or not the time obtained by adding the calculated remaining time to the current time is a time before the start time of the performance start standby effect. It is determined whether or not the variation effect that is being executed in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol this time ends before the performance start standby effect is started (step S2410). Here, when it is determined that the performance start standby effect is ended before the start (step S2410: YES), the post-end switching flag is set to “ON” (step S2411). This post-end switching flag is used to indicate that the production of the special symbol accompanying the variation display ends during the performance start standby production after the moderation production in the production before the performance start. Is a flag for switching display. For this reason, when the switch flag after the end is set to “ON”, the performance start standby effect in the performance before the performance start is switched and displayed at the timing when the current variation effect ends or the next variation effect starts. Will be.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the changing production accompanying the change display of the special symbol this time is not finished before the performance starting standby production is started (step S2410: NO), the overall CPU 141 changes during the performance starting standby production. It is determined whether or not there is a development timing in the production (step S2412). Specifically, the variation production start command received from the production control board 130 is analyzed, and there is a development timing such as development from normal reach to super reach, for example, in the variation production being executed along with the special symbol variation display. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the development timing exists, it is determined whether or not the time corresponding to the development timing is in the specified performance start standby effect.

  By the way, in order to prevent the performance start standby effect from damaging the interest of the change production accompanying the change display of this special symbol, it is necessary to switch to the performance start standby production after the change production has ended. preferable. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7 (A-1) to (A-3), when the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol this time is not finished before the performance start standby effect is started. Until the end timing or the start timing, the performance standby image by the performance start standby effect is reduced on the main liquid crystal display device 5, and the performance standby image is displayed at the end timing or the start timing. It is preferable to switch the display from the reduced display to the display over the entire display screen and to display the changing effect on the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  On the other hand, when the variation effect of one time performed from the start to the end of the variation display of the special symbol has the development timing, that is, the switching timing of the production, until the development timing, The performance standby image by the performance start standby effect is reduced and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5, and the performance standby image is switched from the reduced display to the display over the entire display screen at the development timing, and the sub liquid crystal display is displayed. If the variation effect is displayed on the device 6, it is possible to suppress the performance start standby effect from damaging the interest of the variation effect.

  Therefore, if the overall CPU 141 determines that there is a development timing in the variable production during the performance start standby production (step S2412: YES), the general CPU 141 sets the development switching flag to “ON” (step S2413). Here, the development time switching flag is a flag indicating whether or not the performance standby image is switched from the reduced display to the display over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 at the development timing of the effect in the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that there is no development timing in the variation production during the performance start standby production (step S2412: NO), the development CPU does not have a development timing (separation) timing during the performance start standby production. The rear switching flag is set to “ON” (step S2411).
In this case, as shown in FIGS. 7A-1 to 7A-3, until the end timing or the start timing is reached, the performance standby image by the performance start standby effect is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5. In a reduced display, when the end timing or the start timing is reached, the performance standby image is switched from the reduced display to the display over the entire display screen, and the variation effect is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Become.

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2411, executes the process of step S2413, or determines that the flag setting process is completed (step S2408: YES), the development switching flag is “ON”. It is determined whether it is set to (step S2418). If it is determined that the development time switching flag is not set to “ON” (step S2418: NO), the process proceeds to a music performance effect start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the development time switching flag is set to “ON” (step S2418: YES), it becomes the development timing based on the analysis result of the variable production start command related to the current normal production. It is determined whether or not (step S2419). If it is determined that the development timing is not reached (step S2419: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the development timing has come (step S2419: YES), the performance standby image that has been reduced in the main liquid crystal display device 5 is displayed from the reduced display to the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5. A switching process (step S2420) for displaying the fluctuating effect by the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is performed along with the switching display.

  In this way, the overall CPU 141 specifies the development timing of the dynamic production (production switching timing) based on the variable production start command received from the production control board 130, and determines that the start time of the performance start standby production has come. From the reduced display to the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, the performance standby image that has been reduced on the main liquid crystal display device 5 at the specified development timing is displayed from the reduced display to the end time of the performance start standby effect. Display switching.

  On the other hand, after the current special symbol variation display is completed, the following processing is performed. That is, when determining that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S2407: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the post-end switching flag is set to “ON” (step S2421). Here, when it is determined that the switch flag after the end is not set to “ON” (step S2421: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process of step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the post-end switching flag is set to “ON” (step S2421: YES), for example, based on the reception status of the hold display command and the variable effect start command from the effect control board 130, It is determined whether or not the first special symbol determination is suspended (step S2422). If it is determined that the first special symbol determination is not suspended (step S2422: NO), it is determined whether or not a variable effect end command is received from the effect control board 130 (step S2423). Here, when it is determined that the variation effect end command has not been received (step S2423: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process of step S2500.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the change effect end command has been received (step S2423: YES), the performance standby image that has been reduced and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 covers the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 from the reduced display. A switching process (step S2425) for displaying a change effect by the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is performed while switching to display.
Therefore, if the first special symbol determination is not held at the end of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time, the end timing of the variation effect associated with the variation display of the special symbol this time is the main liquid crystal display device 5. This is the switching timing for switching the performance standby image, which has been reduced, to display over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 from the reduced display.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the first special symbol determination is suspended (step S2422: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not a variable effect start command is received from the effect control board 130 (step S2424). Here, when it is determined that the variation effect start command has not been received (step S2424: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process of step S2500.

  By the way, when the variation effect start command is received immediately after the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is completed, the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the next special symbol is started accordingly. . For this reason, the timing at which the special symbol variation display is started next after the special symbol variation display is completed, that is, the timing at which the next variation representation is started in response to the variation representation start command is also the main liquid crystal display device 5. This is the switching timing for switching the performance standby image, which has been reduced in step 1, to display over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 from the reduced display. For this reason, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the change effect start command has been received (step S2424: YES), the performance standby image that has been reduced in the main liquid crystal display device 5 is displayed from the reduced display to the main liquid crystal display device 5. The display is switched to display over the entire display screen, and the switching process (step S2425) for displaying the variation effect by the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is executed.

  As described above, when the special symbol is variably displayed at the start time of the performance start standby effect, the overall CPU 141 performs the performance start standby effect over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 after the end of the variable display. When it is executed, a variation effect by the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is displayed.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that a special game (during jackpot game) is in progress (step S2403: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 46, it determines whether or not a long game is being played (step S2403). S2426). When a long win game is performed, an opening effect start command, an in-round effect start command, and an ending effect start command are transmitted from the effect control board 130 as commands for instructing the execution of the hit effect accompanying the long win game. On the other hand, when a short hit game is performed, a short hit effect start command and a short hit effect end command are transmitted from the effect control board 130. For this reason, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the long hit game is being executed based on which command of these commands is being executed.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that a long game is being played (step S2426: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is before the start of the final round (step S2427). Here, when it is determined that it is not before the start of the final round (step S2427: NO), the process proceeds to step S2435 described later.

  By the way, during a long hit game, an in-round effect start command is transmitted from the effect control board 130 every time a long open round game is started, and an in-round effect is performed for each round. In the in-round effect, at least a part of the display content (for example, a display indicating the current number of rounds) is updated each time the in-round effect start command is received by the image sound control board 140. In other words, every time the effect start command during round is received by the image sound control board 140, the hit effect accompanying the long hit game is switched.

  Therefore, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is before the start of the final round (step S2427: YES), it determines whether or not an in-round effect start command has been received from the effect control board 130 (step S2428). Here, when it is determined that the in-round production start command has not been received (step S2428: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance production start process in step S2500.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the round start effect start command has been received (step S2428: YES), the overall CPU 141 displays the performance standby image on the main liquid crystal display device 5 in a reduced display. A switching process (step S2429) for switching the displayed performance standby image from a reduced display to a display over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is executed.

As described above, when the start time of the performance start standby effect is reached during the long open round game, the general CPU 141 displays the performance standby image associated with the performance start standby effect during the long open round game on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5. Is displayed in a reduced size, and after the long open round game is completed, a performance standby image is displayed over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5.
In this embodiment, the performance standby image associated with the performance start standby effect is reduced at the timing when the next long open round game is started after the long open round game being executed at the start time of the performance start standby effect ends. The case of switching from display to whole area display will be described. You may make it switch.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the music selected by the player may be played during the long hit game. When the performance start standby effect or the music performance effect is started during the reproduction of such a music, it is necessary to stop the reproduction of the music. However, if the player selects a desired piece of music but that piece of music is not played to the end, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the performance start standby effect or the music performance effect is started during the reproduction of the music, the reproduction of the music is stopped and the reproduction of the music is started from the beginning after the music performance effect is finished. I will try again. In order to realize such control, the following processing is performed following the processing in step S2430.

  That is, following step S2430, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the selected music piece is being played based on, for example, whether or not the VDP 142 is performing a drawing process related to the music piece playback (step S2430). S2431). If it is determined that the music is not being reproduced (step S2431: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the music is being played back (step S2431: YES), the overall CPU 141 causes the VDP 142 and the sound DSP 143 to stop playing the music (step S2432). Then, music information that can specify the type of the music for which playback has been stopped is stored in the control RAM 145 (step S2433), and the replay flag stored in the control RAM 145 is set to “ON” (step S2434). This replay flag is a flag indicating whether or not to start playing the music corresponding to the music information after the music performance effect is finished.

  By the way, when it becomes the start time of the performance start standby effect after the last round start in the long hit game, before the long hit game ends, a process to change the effect during the round by receiving the start command during the round is performed. There is nothing. In such a case, the performance standby image is displayed in a reduced size on the main liquid crystal display device 5 until the ending of the long hit game ends, and the performance standby image is displayed in the main liquid crystal display device 5 at the timing when the ending of the long hit game ends. When the image is being reduced, the performance standby image that has been reduced is switched from the reduced display to the display over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  Further, the short win effect associated with the short hit game is a series from the start of the short hit game to the end of the ending, and there is no switch timing of the output in the middle. For this reason, if the start time of the performance start standby effect is reached during the short hit game, the performance standby image is reduced on the main liquid crystal display device 5 until the end of the short hit game ending, and the short hit game ending is performed. When the performance standby image is being reduced and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 at the end timing, the reduced performance standby image is switched from the reduced display to the display over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5. Perform the switching process.

  For this reason, when the general CPU 141 determines that the game is not long hit (step S2426: NO), and determines that it is not before the final round (step S2427: NO), for example, an ending effect start command (or short hit) It is determined whether or not the ending of the long hit game (or short hit game) has ended based on the elapsed time since the reception of the effect end command) (step S2435). If it is determined that the ending has not ended (step S2435: NO), the process proceeds to a music performance effect start process in step S2500. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending has been completed (step S2435: YES), the process proceeds to step S2429, and if the performance standby image is being reduced in the main liquid crystal display device 5, the reduced display is displayed. A switching process is performed in which the performance standby image is switched from reduced display to display over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  In this way, when the start time of the performance start standby effect is reached after the long open round game of the final round in the long win game is started, until the ending of the long open round game ends, the main liquid crystal display device 5 When the performance standby image is displayed in a reduced size, and the ending of the long open round game is finished, if the performance standby image is displayed in a reduced size on the main liquid crystal display device 5, the performance standby image that has been reduced in size is displayed in a reduced size. Is switched to display over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5.

[Music performance production start processing by the image sound control board 140]
FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the music performance effect start process in step S2500 of FIG. Subsequent to the performance control process before performance start in step S2400, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the music performance flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 47 (step S2501). If it is determined that the music performance flag is not set to “ON” (step S2501: NO), the process proceeds to the normal performance control process in step S2600.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance flag is set to “ON” (step S2501: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets all the flags related to the performance before the performance start to “OFF” (step S2502). Here, all the flags related to the performance before the performance start are specifically the performance pre-start flag, the post-end switching flag, and the development switching flag shown in FIG.

  Following the processing in step S2502, the overall CPU 141 identifies the current date based on the latest RTC information stored in the control RAM 145 (step S2503), and the current state is determined in the same manner as in step S2107. It is determined whether or not all songs are released (step S2504).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are not released (step S2504: NO), the overall CPU 141 sets the performance management table (see FIG. 38) stored in the control ROM 144 in the control RAM 145 (step S2505). A new song corresponding to the date is selected (step S2506). For example, when the current date is December 3, 2013, this date is November 30, 2013, which is the first song performance stage date of the new song A, and December 7, 2013, which is the first song performance stage date of the new song B. Since the date is between the dates, the new song A is selected. For example, when the current date is December 7, 2013, this date is December 7, 2013, which is the first musical performance performance date of the new song B, so the new song B is selected.

  By the way, when the date of performing the music performance effect is a date other than the first music performance effect date, there is one type of new music used for the music performance effect on that day. On the other hand, if the date on which the performance of the music performance is performed is a day corresponding to the date of the performance of the first music performance, the type of the new song changes before and after the transition to the musical performance performance permission state, There are two types of new songs. For this reason, when the current date is the first performance performance date, it is necessary to determine which of the two types of new songs is used.

  Therefore, the overall CPU 141 follows the processing of step S2506 based on whether or not the current date corresponds to one of the first performance performance dates specified in the performance management table. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2507). If it is determined that the date is not the first performance date (step S2507: NO), setting information for executing the performance performance of the new song selected in step S2506 is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2508). ). When the setting information related to the musical performance performance is set in the control RAM 145 in this way, a display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the setting information and set in the display list storage area 1491. As a result, the musical performance performance selected in step S2506 is started.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the first performance performance date (step S2507: YES), it determines whether or not the performance performance permission flag stored in the control RAM 145 is set to “ON”. (Step S2509).

  As illustrated in FIG. 38, when the current date is, for example, December 7, 2013 corresponding to the initial performance performance date of the new song B and the performance performance permission flag is set to “ON”, It is necessary to set setting information for executing the first performance performance of the new song B. On the other hand, when the current date is, for example, December 7, 2013 corresponding to the initial performance performance date of the new song B and the performance performance permission flag is set to “OFF”, it is not the new song B. It is necessary to set setting information for executing the performance performance of the new song A immediately before the new song B.

  Therefore, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance presentation permission flag is set to “ON” (step S2509: YES), the process of step S2506 is performed as in the case where it is determined that it is not the first music performance presentation date. Setting information for executing the performance performance of the new song selected in step S2508 is set. Conversely, when it is determined that the music performance presentation permission flag is not set to “ON” (step S2509: NO), that is, when the music performance presentation permission flag is set to “OFF”, the selection is made in the process of step S2506. The setting information for executing the performance performance of the new song immediately before the new song is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2510).

  As described above, the overall CPU 141 determines that the initial music performance directing permission time specified in the performance management table has passed and sets the music performance directing permission flag to “ON”, and then the elapsed time reaches 1 hour. When it is determined that the time condition is satisfied, the main liquid crystal display device 5 is caused to start the first music performance performance of the new song (new song B in the above example). On the other hand, if it is determined that the above time condition is satisfied in a state where it has not been determined that the first musical performance performance permission time has passed, the first musical performance that has already been performed is performed without performing the first musical performance performance of the new song. Execute the performance of the new song.

  Subsequent to step S2508, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the musical performance performance permission flag is set to “ON” (step S2511). If it is determined that the music performance effect permission flag is set to “ON” (step S2511: YES), the music performance effect permission flag is set to “OFF” (step S2512).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are in an open state (step S2504: YES), the overall performance order management table (see FIG. 41) is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2514). Based on the reset processing count P stored in the control RAM 145, the elapsed time since the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S2515). Here, the reset processing count P is set to “0” when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and is incremented by “1” every time the processing of step S2108 (see FIG. 37) is performed. For this reason, the overall CPU 141 specifies the reset processing count P immediately after determining that the music performance flag is set to “ON” as the elapsed time. For example, when the number of reset processing is updated to “1”, it can be determined that 1 hour has passed at the update timing, and when updated to “3”, 3 hours have passed at the update timing. It can be judged.

  Subsequent to step S2515, the overall CPU 141 selects a new song corresponding to the current date specified in step S2503 and the elapsed time specified in step S2515 (step S2516). Specifically, the type of the new song corresponding to the specified current date and the elapsed time since the power is turned on is read from the music performance presentation order management table. For example, if the current date is February 23 and three hours have passed since the power is turned on, the new song C is selected. For example, if the current date is February 27 and 10 hours have passed since the power is turned on, the new song B is selected.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2516, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for executing the music performance effect of the selected new song in the control RAM 145, similarly to the process of step S2508 (step S2517). The processing of step S2514 to step S2517 is performed every time one hour elapses with reference to the time when the power is turned on in the state where all songs are released.

  When it is determined in the process of step S2511 that the music performance effect permission flag is not set to “ON”, or after the process of step S2512 or after the process of step S2517, the music performance flag is set to “OFF”. After setting (step S2518), the process proceeds to the normal effect control process of step S2600.

  In this way, the overall CPU 141 individually sets the execution timings of the music performance effects of the new songs A to L on the current date, and causes the music performance effects of each new song to be executed at the set execution timing.

  In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where the execution timing of the music performance production | presentation of each new music in an all-song open state was set using the music performance production | presentation order management table illustrated in FIG. 41, as other embodiment, The following configuration may be adopted. That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the execution timings of all new songs are defined in the music performance presentation order management table has been described, but this is used for the performance performances that are executed first on the execution date and the execution date. A new song type may be stored in association with the new song, and the new song may be regularly selected, for example, as a new song D, a new song E, or a new song F based on the new song.

  In addition, a configuration is adopted in which information indicating a new song (for example, new song F) used for the first performance performance of the previous day is held, and the next day (for example, new song G) is selected in order from the next song. May be.

  Also, instead of storing information that prescribes the execution timing, such as the music performance production order management table, for example, a random selection using random numbers in a state where all songs are open, and a new song used for the music performance production is randomly selected. It may be determined. In this case, information indicating the type of a new song already used in the performance of the music performance is retained so that the performance of the same music is not performed more than once a day, and the song is selected by the selection lottery. Then, a configuration of redoing the selection lottery may be added.

  As described above, the overall CPU 141 controls the start timing of the music performance effect and the type of the new song to be used based on the measurement result of the elapsed time, the RTC information, the performance management table, and the music performance effect order management table. In other words, the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 do not depend on whether or not the special symbols are variably displayed by the special symbol indicators 41 and 42 and whether or not the special game is being played (during the big hit game). Perform music performance production.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 47, if it is determined in step S2504 that all songs are in the open state, the music performance management table is set in step S2514, and the new music performed in the music performance effect is changed every time in step S2516. It will be done. Therefore, the special performance is changed every time.

[Flow of productions when transitioning from normal production mode to special production mode]
Next, the flow of each effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50 when the normal effect mode is changed to the special effect mode (the effect before the performance start, the effect of the music performance, and the effect after the performance ends).

[When changing to the special performance mode when the variable performance is not performed]
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the production in the normal production mode when the production time before the performance start is reached when the variation production accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. .

FIG. 48A shows the start time of the performance before the start of the performance, which is a special performance performed in the special performance mode when the customer power-waiting state is in the normal performance mode in the normal power mode where the power saving mode is not in operation. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the effect at the time of becoming.
As shown in FIG. 48 (A), when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the customer waiting command is transmitted from the game control board 100, the state shifts to the customer waiting state. In this customer waiting state, a customer waiting effect is executed, and as illustrated in FIG. 48A, the main liquid crystal display device 5 has a customer waiting effect comprising the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and an advertising video of this model. An image is displayed (see FIG. 48A-1).

Also, in this customer waiting effect, in the sub liquid crystal display device 6, the remaining time from the end of the previous music performance until the start of the next music performance effect is always displayed at the top of the customer waiting effect image, The start time of the next performance performance will be appealed to the player who will play the game. Therefore, the player who will play a game from now on can recognize the start time of the next musical performance performance. In addition, when a new song to be performed next time is introduced together with displaying the remaining time until the next performance performance of the music is displayed, the appeal effect for the player who will play the game is further enhanced.
The remaining time display (countdown display) until the start of the next music performance effect displayed in the customer waiting effect is to prompt the player the start time of the music performance effect together with the remaining time display on the menu screen described above. This corresponds to the second remaining time notification (countdown notification).

When the start time of the performance before the performance starts in such a state where the customer waiting performance is being performed, the host performance is first started (see FIG. 48 (A-2-1)). When the moderator effect is executed, a chime sound is output from the speaker 24, and then an introduction voice for a music performance effect to be started is output from one member of the singer group.
However, as will be described later, when performing the performance before the performance start (of which the moderator effect) during the customer waiting performance, the output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value is reduced to 40%. The sound of the performance before the performance starts is output.
In the customer waiting state, the main liquid crystal display device 5 may display so that the player can recognize that the customer is waiting.
The countdown display displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 in the moderator effect corresponds to a first remaining time notification (countdown notification) for prompting the player to start the music performance effect.

  Thereafter, when the start time of the performance start standby effect is reached, the performance standby image P15 is switched and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 which has previously displayed the game related effects such as the change effect, and the sub effect display etc. are displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6. The performance start standby effect is started by switching and displaying the game related effects (see FIG. 48 (A-2-2)).

  Thereafter, when the start time of the countdown effect is reached, the performance song name image P16 is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5, and the countdown image P25 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6, thereby starting the countdown effect (FIG. 48 ( See A-2-3)). The variation effect image during the countdown effect is displayed on the upper left part of the main liquid crystal display device 5 as a decoration pattern P19 obtained by simplifying the decoration pattern.

Thereafter, at the start time of the music performance effect, the music performance effect image P48 is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5, and the game performance effect is started by switching and displaying the game-related effects such as the fluctuation effect on the sub liquid crystal display device 6. (See FIG. 48A-3). When the performance end time of the music performance is reached, the next performance announcement effect is started as the performance after the performance ends (see FIG. 48 (A-4)). When the next performance announcement effect ends, the DJ performance (FIG. 48). (See (A-5)). When the DJ performance ends, the performance ends after the performance ends, and the special performance mode ends.
When the special effect mode is completed, the mode is shifted to the normal effect mode, and the main liquid crystal display device 5 displays a customer-waiting effect image including a model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and an advertising video of this model (FIG. 48 (A- 6)).

  For FIG. 48 (A), the flow of the production when the start time of the performance announcement production, which is a special production executed in the special production mode, is in the waiting state in the normal production mode in the power saving mode. As mentioned earlier, “Under power saving performance until XX minutes XX seconds” (Stage waiting production) → “Performance until XX seconds” (stage performance before performance start) → “Now until △△△ performance ends “XX minutes XX seconds” (music performance production) → “next △△△ performance” (production after the music is finished) → “During power saving XX minutes XX seconds” (customer waiting production).

FIG. 48B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the effect when the start time of the effect before the performance starts when the variable effect is being stopped and displayed.
As shown in FIG. 48 (B), the right to determine the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is not held (there is no hold memory and the fluctuation associated with the special symbol fluctuation display) When the effect is stopped and displayed), a change stop image of the change effect accompanying the previous change display of the special symbol is displayed (see FIG. 48B-1).
In such a state, when the start time of the performance before the performance start is reached, the host performance is first started (see FIG. 48 (B-2-1)). And when this moderation effect is started, since it is still waiting for a customer, the sound of the moderation effect is output at an output volume that reduces the output volume to the current volume setting value to 40%. The output with the output volume reduced to 40% is maintained until a game-related effect is executed during execution of the special effect or until the special effect is ended.

  Then, when the variable production is started during the moderation production, the output volume that has been lowered to 40% is output at the output volume corresponding to the current volume setting value.

  Thereafter, when the start time of the performance start standby effect is reached, the performance standby image P15 is reduced and displayed on the left side of the main liquid crystal display device 5 because the change effect that has started to fluctuate before the start of the performance start standby effect has not ended. (FIG. 48 (B-2-2)). Then, when the variation production is finished during the performance start standby production and the next variation display production is started, the performance standby image P15 which has been reduced in size is switched and displayed over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5. At the same time, game-related effects such as variable effects are switched and displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (see FIG. 48 (B-2-3)).

  Thereafter, when the start time of the countdown effect is reached, the performance song name image P16 is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5, and the countdown image P25 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6, thereby starting the countdown effect (FIG. 48 ( B-3)). The variation effect image during the countdown effect is displayed on the upper left part of the main liquid crystal display device 5 as a decoration pattern P19 obtained by simplifying the decoration pattern.

Thereafter, at the start time of the music performance effect, the music performance effect image P48 is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5, and the game performance effect is started by switching and displaying the game-related effects such as the fluctuation effect on the sub liquid crystal display device 6. (Refer to FIG. 48 (B-4) and (B-5)). When the performance end time of the music performance is reached, the next performance announcement effect is started as the performance after the performance ends (see FIG. 48 (B-6)). When the next performance announcement effect ends, the DJ performance (FIG. 48). (See (B-7)). When the DJ performance ends, the performance ends after the performance ends, and the special performance mode ends.
When the special effect mode ends, the process shifts to the normal effect mode, and the variable effect in the normal effect mode is executed (see FIG. 48 (B-8)).

Note that there are the following four methods for switching from the display layout for DJ performance in FIG. 48 (B-7) to the display layout for normal performance mode in FIG. 48 (B-8).
The first method is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 has received the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main CPU 101, and at the timing when the general CPU 141 has received the variable effect end command transmitted from the sub CPU 131. A method of switching the display of the main liquid crystal display 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 from the display layout to the display layout for the normal effect mode (method 1 based on the symbol determination command transmitted from the main CPU 101).

  The second method is to start fluctuation before the DJ effect starts, and when this change effect is stopped and displayed after the end of the DJ effect, when the hold memory is stored, the change to all stored hold memories Until the production ends, the layout display for the DJ production is continued, and the sub CPU 131 receives the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the variation production for the last reserved memory among all the stored memories. Based on the method of switching from the display layout for DJ effects to the display layout for the normal effect mode at the timing when the overall CPU 141 receives the change effect end command transmitted from the sub CPU 131 (in accordance with the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main CPU 101). Method 2) based.

  The third method is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 receives the next change start command transmitted from the main CPU 101, and the display layout for the normal effect mode from the display layout for the change effect DJ effect transmitted from the sub CPU 131. (Method 1 based on a change start command transmitted from the main CPU 101).

The fourth method is to start the fluctuation before the DJ effect starts, and when this change effect is stopped and displayed after the end of the DJ effect, the hold memory is stored. The display layout for the DJ effect is continued until the effect ends, and after the last variable effect is stopped and displayed among all the stored memories, the sub CPU 131 displays the next change start command transmitted from the main CPU 101. A method of switching from the display layout for DJ performance to the display layout for the normal performance mode (transmitted from the main CPU 101) at the timing when the overall CPU 141 receives the change production start command transmitted from the sub CPU 131 based on the reception. Method 2) based on change start command.
By using any of these methods, the display layout for the DJ effect can be shifted to the display layout for the normal effect mode after the end of the change effect.
As described above, when switching from the display layout for the DJ effect to the display layout for the normal effect mode after the end of the change effect, the display timing in the display layout display for the normal effect mode is the main timing after the end of the change effect. This is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 has received a new command transmitted from the CPU 101.

In the case where the second method and the fourth method are employed, when the number of reserved memories relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved and stored when the DJ performance ends, the reserved method is stored. The special effect mode is extended until the variable effects for all the stored memory numbers are stopped and displayed, and during the special effect mode extension period, the second special effect that is a special effect peculiar to the special effect mode extension period is executed. You may make it do. In addition, during the special effect mode extension period, a mini game that is not related to the variable effect may be played. By doing in this way, gameability can be improved.
Note that this special effect mode extension period may be provided as part of the normal effect mode. That is, the normal effect mode may be provided with a first normal effect mode and a second normal effect mode, and the special effect mode extension period may be the second normal effect mode. In this case, after the special effect mode is finished, if the reserved memory number is reserved, the process shifts to the second normal effect mode, and when all the variable effects of the reserved memory number are ended, the process shifts to the first normal effect mode. become.
In the second method and the fourth method described above, “if the variation starts before the music performance effect ends, and when the variation effect is stopped and displayed after the music performance effect ends, the hold memory is stored. "If the number of reserved memories related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved and stored when the musical performance performance ends," can be considered.

[If you are in a jackpot gaming state when transitioning to normal performance mode]
FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display image displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 when the game state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the normal effect mode. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display image in the case of shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the special effect mode.
In the following description, the images used to produce the jackpot gaming state are collectively referred to as “jackpot gaming images”. The jackpot game image includes a round display image P61, an information image P62, a lively image P63, and a game effect image P64. These images will be specifically described later.

First, for comparison, a jackpot game image in the normal performance mode will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 49 shows an example in which the per 8R with time reduction occurs.
As shown in FIG. 49, a round display image P61 for displaying the number of rounds in each round is displayed. Here, the round display images P61 displayed as “Round 1” to “Round 8” are sequentially displayed for each round.

  By winning the jackpot, the opening is displayed first. In the example of FIG. 49, “Right-handed!” Is used in order to inform the player that the lottery result is a big hit by the characters “Big jackpot!” And that the game ball is being fired toward the right half of the game area 111. The information image P62 informing the instruction information “is displayed.

  Then, from round 1 to round 3, an effect is made using a lively image P63 having a content that enlivens the big hit. In the example of FIG. 49, the lively image P63 displays a message celebrating the jackpot by the character.

  In addition, from round 4 to round 7, a game is executed in which the type of jackpot is notified. This game is played using the game effect image P64. For example, the game effect image P64 displays “challenge chance” in the round 4 and notifies that the game will be started. In addition, the game effect image P64 displays the message “Press the button to clear it!” In round 5, and in the present embodiment, the explanation is made that the game is played by pressing the effect button 26 (see FIG. 1). I do. Then, the game effect image P64 causes the game to be actually played in round 6. Further, the game effect image P64 informs that, in this example, the game effect image P64 is “a big hit where a short-time gaming state occurs” by a display such as “determined short-time”.

Then, in the final round 8, an information image P62 is displayed that clearly indicates the shift to the time-saving mode in which the time-saving gaming state is reached after the end of the big hit game, and after the round 8 is finished, the ending information image P62 is displayed.
The ending information image P62 includes a jackpot end notification information image for notifying that the jackpot game is ended, and a CI (corporate identity) such as the manufacturer name or manufacturer name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 following this information. ) It is composed of a display information image and a card return promotion display information image for prompting the player to return the card following this information.

  When the ending effect ends, the jackpot effect ends. When the special effect mode is in effect even after the end of the jackpot effect, the display is as shown in FIGS.

[If you are in a jackpot gaming state when transitioning to special performance mode]
On the other hand, when the jackpot game is performed when the mode is shifted to the special performance mode, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 displays images related to the performance before the performance start (performance standby image P15, performance song name image P16) and music Special effect images such as the performance effect image P48 and an image related to the effect after the performance end (next performance notification image) are displayed.
Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot effect is performed when shifting to the special effect mode, a specific image is selected from among the images constituting the jackpot game image according to a predetermined condition. The entire screen is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, or the display of a specific image among the images constituting the jackpot game image is omitted. Further, the special effect image is displayed as a whole in accordance with the display mode of the jackpot game image.
Here, among the images constituting the jackpot game image, the condition for selecting a specific image to be displayed or omitted as a whole is, for example, an image including information that affects the number of balls for the player (right Based on whether the image is a hit notification image, etc., or an image including information that gives an accent to the game or information indicating that the game state is changed (such as a time-decision game effect or a ending image during a big hit). Set.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display image when the music performance effect in the special effect mode is shifted to the jackpot game state.
FIG. 50 shows a case where, for example, a big win (long win) gaming state is entered when the special effect mode is entered, and a big win (long win) effect is performed.

First, in the opening effect, in the main liquid crystal display device 5, the information image P62 displays an opening image P20 for notifying that the lottery result is a big hit with the characters “big hit !!”. In addition, the information image P62 displays a right-handed notification image P18 that is “right-handed” information in order to inform the player that a game ball is to be fired toward the right half of the game area 111.
The information image P62 of the opening effect is a game in which the big winning game state is opened and the special winning opening 125 is opened, and a game ball is launched toward the special winning opening 125 located on the right side of the gaming area 111. It contains information that affects the number of balls that are played by a person. Therefore, the information image P62 is displayed in a large size as a whole over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5. On the other hand, the music performance effect image P48 is reduced and displayed superimposed on the opening image P20.
In this opening effect, the type of jackpot or name of the jackpot that has occurred may be displayed.

  In addition, when the opening effect is not yet started before the opening effect is started (the effect before the performance start, the performance of the music performance, or the effect after the performance is not executed), the opening effect shown in FIG. Is displayed.

  Subsequent to the opening effect, during the long open round effect, the mid-round display image P61 is displayed in each round. The round display image P61 shows the number of rounds that the special winning opening 125 opens, and includes information that influences the number of balls to be played by the player. Accordingly, the round display image P61 is displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5.

However, in rounds 1 to 3 during the long opening round effect, the boost image P63 (see FIG. 49) that excites the jackpot displayed in the normal effect mode is not displayed. The player recognizes that the game has already shifted to the jackpot gaming state due to the opening effect, and can directly confirm that the round display image P61 and the big prize opening 125 are opened for a certain period of time. For this reason, the smashing image P63 that simply raises the jackpot does not include information that influences the number of balls for the player.
That is, it is considered that the display priority of the lively image P63 is lower than that of other jackpot game images. Therefore, in this embodiment, the display of the raised image P63 is omitted. At this time, on the contrary, the music performance effect image P <b> 48 is displayed large overall on the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5.

In addition, when the long opening round effect is started, the transition to the special effect mode has not yet been made (the effect before the performance start, the performance of the music performance, or the effect after the performance has not been executed), as shown in FIG. Each long open round effect corresponding to each long open round is displayed.
In addition, when a transition is made to a special performance mode during a certain long-opening round effect (the performance before the performance start, the performance of the music performance, or the performance after the performance is not executed), the start timing of the next long-opening round effect is shown in FIG. Switch to the long open round effect shown in.

  In addition, the game effect image P64 (promotion effect image) in the “challenge chance” game effect as the promotion effect performed from round 4 to round 7 in the long open round effect and the short time state in round 8 are notified. The information image P62 (short time notification effect image) is considered to include information that influences the number of balls for the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game effect image P64 and the information image P62 are displayed entirely over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5. On the other hand, the music performance effect image P48 is reduced and displayed superimposed on the game effect image P64.

When the “Challenge Chance” game production is not started yet, the transition to the special production mode has not yet been made (the performance before the performance start or the performance performance before the performance or the performance after the performance has not been executed). The displayed “challenge chance” game effect is displayed.
In addition, when the “Challenge Chance” game production in a certain long open round is entered, the transition to the special production mode (the production before the performance start or the performance of the music performance or the production after the performance ends) is performed. From the start timing, switching to the “challenge chance” game effect in the long open round shown in FIG.

After the final round 8, the jackpot end notification information image for notifying the end of the jackpot game, and the CI (corporate name) of the manufacturer or distributor of the pachinko gaming machine 1 following this information Identity) Display information image and an ending information image P62 composed of this information and a card return promotion display information image for prompting the player to return the card are displayed over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5. Is done.
The information image P62 of the ending effect informs the player of the change of the gaming state in which the jackpot gaming state is terminated and the subsequent gaming state (time-short gaming state (or non-time-short gaming state)) is notified to the player. And includes information for impressing the maker of the CI display to the player, and information for preventing card theft such as a card return promotion display, which is highly important for both the player and the maker. Since it is information, the music performance effect image P48 is not displayed.

  After the big hit gaming state is finished (after the ending is finished), the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 are displayed as shown in FIG.

  If the ending effect has not yet been shifted to the special effect mode before the ending effect is started (the effect before the performance start or the performance of the music performance or the effect after the performance has not been executed), the ending effect shown in FIG. Is displayed.

  In FIG. 50, when the special effect mode ends in the middle of a certain round and becomes the normal effect mode, there are three methods for displaying the jackpot game image in the normal effect mode on the main liquid crystal display device 5. .

  The first method is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 receives the round start command related to the next round transmitted from the main CPU 101, and the timing at which the general CPU 141 receives the during-round production start command transmitted from the sub CPU 131. A method of displaying a jackpot game image in the normal effect mode on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 (a method based on a round start command transmitted from the main CPU 101).

  The second method is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 has received the round end command related to the current round transmitted from the main CPU 101 and the timing at which the overall CPU 141 has received the in-round effect end command transmitted from the sub CPU 131. A method of displaying a jackpot game image in the normal effect mode on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 (a method based on a round end command transmitted from the main CPU 101).

The third method is based on the timing at which the overall CPU 141 receives the in-round production end command transmitted from the sub CPU 131 based on the reception of the round end command related to the current round transmitted from the main CPU 101. A method of displaying a jackpot game image in the normal effect mode on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 (a method based on a round end command transmitted from the main CPU 101).
By using any of these methods, when the special effect mode ends in the middle of a round and becomes the normal effect mode, the jackpot game image in the normal effect mode can be displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5. .

As another method, when the ending effect in FIG. 50 ends, the jackpot effect ends. When the special effect ends before the jackpot effect ends, the hold stored until the special effect ends. If there is a memory (or a hold memory stored until the end of the jackpot effect), the special effect mode is extended until the variable effects of all the stored memories are completed, and the special effect specific to the extended special effect mode is used. A second special effect may be executed. As the second special effect, for example, when the variable effect is a variable effect that is a big hit, a special jackpot finalizing effect different from the normal jackpot finalizing effect is performed, or a mini game unrelated to the game is performed. Also good. By doing in this way, gameability can be improved.
In this case, when the transition is made to the normal performance mode, the transition may be made based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command for the last variation effect in the extended special effect mode, or the next variation You may make it transfer based on having received the start command.

  As described above, when the special effect mode ends in the middle of a certain round and becomes the normal effect mode, when the jackpot game image in the normal effect mode is displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, the display timing is This is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 receives a new command transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the special effect mode ends.

  Here, when the big hit (long hit) occurs when the special performance mode and the performance before the performance start or the performance of the music performance or the performance after the performance end are shown in FIG. 50, and FIG. In the case where a short hit occurs when there is no special performance mode and the performance before the performance starts, the performance of the music performance, or the performance after the performance ends, the display mode of the performance is arranged.

  [1] An opening effect is performed during the opening of a long hit effect (or a short hit effect), and this opening effect includes a display of an effect image for informing the type of jackpot and an effect image for prompting a right-hand hit. For this reason, when performing the performance before the performance start, the performance of the music performance, or the performance after the performance during the opening performance, the image of the opening performance is displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 while the performance image before the performance starts. Alternatively, the music performance effect image or the effect image after the performance ends is reduced and superimposed on the opening effect image.

  [2] The long-round production of the long win production is performed during the round. If the production during the round is a normal mid-round production that does not include the promotion production, the performance starts during the long-open round game. The previous effect image, the music performance effect image, or the effect image after the performance is displayed large on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, and the image of the effect during the round is superimposed on one of these two images.

  [3] When the production during the long open round includes the promotion production, since the importance of the production during the round is higher than the production during the round not including the promotion production, in the promotion production execution round during the long opening round game, The effect during the round is displayed large on the entire area of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, and the performance image before the performance start, the performance performance image for the performance, or the performance image after the performance is reduced and superimposed.

  [4] If the effect during the long open round includes the time notification effect, since the importance of the effect during the round is higher than the effect during the round not including the time notification effect, the time notification effect execution round during the long open game , The effect during the round is displayed in a large area on the entire area of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, and the effect image before the performance start, the performance effect image of the performance of the performance, or the effect image after the end of the performance is reduced and superimposed.

  [5] During the short opening round production of the short hit game, as a short hit production, a short rushing production effect is performed, in which the player's expectation for entering the short-time gaming state is envisaged. Since it is highly important for the player, during the short open round game, the effect image before starting the performance or the music performance effect image is displayed while the image of the short time rushing effect is greatly displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5. Alternatively, after the performance is finished, the effect image is reduced and superimposed on the image of the short time entry effect.

  [6] During the ending effect, since the ending effect performed during the ending is highly important for the player and the manufacturer, an image of the ending effect is displayed over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, The performance image before the performance start, the performance performance image of the music performance, or the performance image after the performance is not displayed.

  As described above, when shifting to the jackpot game state in the special effect mode, basically, the jackpot game image is displayed as a whole and the special effect image is reduced and displayed. Further, depending on the contents of the images constituting the jackpot game image, the display of a part of the image constituting the jackpot game image to be displayed when shifting to the jackpot game state in the normal performance mode is omitted, and the special effect image is displayed as a whole. To be displayed. Thereby, the player can enjoy both the game effect and the special effect as appropriate. In addition, since necessary information for the game using the game ball is appropriately notified, the performance image before the performance start, the performance performance image of the performance performance, or the performance image after the performance end does not interfere with the game. The player can play the game smoothly.

  In the above description, the jackpot effect is described as an example of the game effect executed in the special effect mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to a case where a game effect such as a probability change notification that is performed in the state of transitioning to the special effect mode is performed. That is, for example, when performing a game effect such as performing a mini game and notifying the probability variation state according to the game result, the game effect screen is displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 while displaying a special effect image. Zoom out. Further, the special effect image is displayed as a whole in a state where the game and the probability change notification are not performed. Even with this configuration, the player can appropriately enjoy both the game effect and the special effect.

Note that the information image P62 or the game effect image P64 is entirely displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 in the opening of FIG. On the other hand, the music performance effect image P48 has been reduced and superimposed on the game effect image P64, but it may be less interesting for a player who wants to enjoy a promotion effect or the like. During the promotion effect, the music performance effect (or the effect image before the performance start or the effect image after the performance end) may not be executed (interrupted), or the image may not be displayed.
As a result, the interest of the player who wants to enjoy promotion and the like is not reduced.

[Normal production control processing by image sound control board 140]
51 to 55 are detailed flowcharts of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. In this normal effect control process, setting information related to the normal effect is set in the control RAM 145. The display of the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is controlled based on the display list for main liquid crystal or the display list for sub liquid crystal created based on the setting information, thereby realizing a normal effect. Is done.

  Subsequent to the music performance production start process in step S2500, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not a command from the production control board 130 has been received as shown in FIG. 51 (step S2601). If it is determined that a command has not been received (step S2601: NO), the process proceeds to a music performance effect end process in step S2700.

  When determining that the command from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S2601: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the command is a customer waiting effect start command (step S2602). If it is determined that the command is a customer waiting effect start command (step S2602: YES), setting information for starting display of the predetermined customer waiting effect image is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2603). However, when the special effect (the performance before the performance start or the performance of the music performance or the performance after the performance is finished) is executed at the timing when the image sound control board 140 receives the customer waiting effect start command, the general CPU 141 performs the special effect. Setting information related to the customer waiting effect is set.

In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where a predetermined | prescribed customer waiting effect was performed, every time the first music performance effect of a new music is performed like a long hit game opening effect and an ending effect, it becomes a customer waiting effect. The video used may be changed as appropriate based on the latest song, or the latest song may be output from the speaker 24 during the customer waiting effect. Thereby, before the player starts the game, it is possible to grasp to what new music the performance of the music performance has been performed or to predict the new music to be performed next.
Note that the output volume of the sound output during the tune waiting effect is preferably set to an output volume that is lower than the normal output volume, such as 40% of the output volume corresponding to the currently set volume.

  If the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2603 or determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a customer command (step S2602: NO), the command from the effect control board 130 is a hold display command. It is determined whether or not (step S2605).

  The variation effect in the present embodiment is performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 when a special effect such as a pre-performance start effect, a music performance effect, or a post-performance effect is not performed, and these effects are performed. Sometimes, it is performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (see FIGS. 6C, 6E, and 6F). For this reason, the hold display image indicating that the first special symbol determination is put on hold is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 when these special effects are not performed (see, for example, FIG. 6A). May be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (see, for example, FIGS. 6C, 6E, and 6F). Further, since the special symbol determination is not performed during the special game, the hold display image is not displayed during the special game (see, for example, FIG. 7 (B-3)). In order to realize such display control of the hold display image, the overall CPU 141 executes the following processing.

  That is, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is a hold display command (step S2605: YES), for example, based on the processing status of the VDP 142, determines whether or not the special effect is being performed. (Step S2606). If it is determined that the special effect is not being executed (step 2606: NO), setting information for additionally displaying the hold display image on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2608).

  If the general CPU 141 determines that the special effect is being executed (step S2606: YES), for example, the reception status of the command related to the special game from the effect control board 130, the elapsed time after receiving the command, or the like. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a special game is in progress (step S2609).

If it is determined that the special game is not in progress (step S2609: NO), the general CPU 141 will display the hold display image on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (during the performance start standby effect, during the next performance notification effect). It is determined whether or not there is (step S2609-1). If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is time to display the hold display on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (during the performance start standby effect, during the next performance announcement effect), it adds a hold display image to the sub liquid crystal display device 6 Setting information for display is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2610).
If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not time to display the hold display on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (during the performance start standby effect, during the next performance announcement effect), the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2608.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2608, executes the process of step S2610, determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a hold display command (step S2605: NO), or during special game (Step S2609: YES), it is determined whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a change effect start command (step S2612).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is a change effect start command (step S2612: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the performance performance of the music performance has never been performed. (Step S2613). Specifically, whether or not the current date and time indicated by the RTC information is the date and time before the first song performance stage date and the first song performance stage time of the new song A defined in the performance management table (see FIG. 38). It is determined whether or not the performance is in an unperformed state.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the performance has not been performed (step S2613: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets a default table in the control RAM 145 as a display list creation table (step S2614).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not in the unperformed state (step S2613: NO), it determines whether or not a special effect is being executed (step S2615), as in the process of step S2606.

  If it is determined that the special effect is being executed (step S2615: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets a sub liquid crystal effect table as a display list creation table in the control RAM 145 (step S2617).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the special performance is not being executed (step S2615: NO), the overall CPU 141 identifies the new song used for the previous music performance performance (step S2618). For example, if the new song information indicating the new song used for the performance of the music is stored in the control RAM 145 and the new song information is updated every time the performance of the music is performed, it is used for the previous performance of the music. Can be identified.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2618, the overall CPU 141 sets a main table corresponding to the specified new song in the control RAM 145 (step S2619). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 35, in the present embodiment, twelve main tables of the new song A main table to the new song L main table are stored in the control ROM 144, so these twelve main tables are stored. The main table of the new song identified by the processing in step S2618 is selected and set in the control RAM 145.

  The overall CPU 141 acquires a random number for selection when the process of step S2617 is executed, when the process of step S2614 is executed, or when the process of step S2619 is executed (step S2620). Specifically, the image acoustic control board 140 performs a random number update process for updating the selection random number or the like at a predetermined cycle shorter than the interrupt process, and the overall CPU 141 performs effect control on the selection random number. The value at the time of receiving the change effect start command from the board 130 is acquired.

  Then, the overall CPU 141 determines the display content in the normal effect based on the acquired selection random number and the set display list creation table (step S2621). In the display list creation table, a special symbol variation pattern and a plurality of effect patterns of normal effects are associated with each other. Then, for each of the plurality of effect patterns of the normal effect, the type of image data used as a material when generating images of each effect (decorative symbol effect, background image effect, character effect, etc.) constituting the normal effect, A random number for selection is associated. The general CPU 141 first analyzes the change effect start command and specifies the effect pattern of the current normal effect. Then, the type of image data used for the normal effect is determined by specifying the type of image data corresponding to the random number for selection acquired in step S2620 for the specified effect pattern. The types of image data include default, new song A, new song B, new song C, new song D, new song E, new song F, new song G, new song H, new song I, new song J, new song K, and new song L. For example, when default is selected as the type of image data for the background image effect, a default background image generated using the default image data is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 and a new song A is selected. The new song A background image generated using the image data of the new song A is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  The overall CPU 141 sets setting information for starting display of the game effect image having the display content determined in the process of step S2621 in the control RAM 145 (step S2622). By setting the display list generated based on the setting information in the display list storage area 1491, a variation effect as a normal effect using the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is started.

  In this way, the overall CPU 141 causes the main liquid crystal display device 5 to perform a normal effect when the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. At that time, it is determined which music performance effect of the new song has been executed by the main liquid crystal display device 5, and a display list creation table is selected based on the determination result.

  Here, a change in the background image during the normal production triggered by each display list creation table and the music performance production will be described. Here, the change in the normal effect will be described by taking an example of the change in the background image triggered by the music performance effect. However, the character displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, the BGM output from the speaker 24, etc. It changes with the performance of music performance.

  FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of a default table. As exemplified in FIG. 56, the default table defines two types of image data for generating a background image: a first default background and a second default background. For example, when the selection random number is 100, in the default table, 50 different selection random numbers are assigned to these two types of backgrounds. For this reason, in the said step S2621, it selects in the ratio of 50%, respectively. This default table is used from the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced to the pachinko hall until the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, and thereafter, it is not used even in the state where all songs are released.

  FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram of the new song A main table. As illustrated in FIG. 57, the new song A main table defines three types of image data for generating a background image: a first default background, a second default background, and a new song A background. . For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song A main table, 25 selection random numbers are assigned to the first default background, and 25 similarly to the second default background. Random numbers for selection are assigned, and 50 random numbers for selection are assigned to the background of the new song A. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song A background is selected at a rate of 50%, the second default background is selected at a rate of 25%, and the first default background is selected at the rate of 25%.

  The new song A main table is used for one week from the start of the first song performance effect of the new song A to the start of the first song performance effect of the new song B before shifting to the open state of all songs. When the first song performance of the new song A is performed, the background image of the new song A is most likely to appear at 50% for one week, so the player can produce the new song A even after the song performance of the new song A is performed. Can also enjoy the performance of the new song A after the first time.

  The new song A main table is different from the default table in that the new song A background can be newly selected. Here, for example, if the selection rates of the first default background, the second default background, and the new song A background are set to be the same, the appearance rate of the normal effect based on the new song A is lowered. As a result, the opportunity for the player to enjoy the normal performance based on the new song A is reduced, and it is clearly recognized that the normal production has been switched by the first song performance production of the new song A (the production related to the new song A has been newly added). There is a possibility of disappearing. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the selection rate of the new song A background is increased by lowering the selection rates of the first default background and the second default background compared to the default table.

  As is clear from the above description, the general CPU 141 selects the default table until the first music performance effect of the new song A is performed, and uses the normal effect data stored in the CGROM 148 as the normal effect. The main liquid crystal display device 5 is caused to execute. On the other hand, after the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, the selection rates of the first default background and the second default background are set lower than the default table, and instead, the selection rate of the new song A background. The new song A main table set with the highest is selected. Thereby, the main liquid crystal display device 5 is caused to execute the effect using the special effect data (here, the image data of the new song A) stored in the CGROM 148 as the normal effect.

  FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram of the new song B main table. As exemplified in FIG. 58, the new song B main table defines three types of image data for generating a background image: a second default background, a new song A background, and a new song B background. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song B main table, 15 selection random numbers are assigned to the second default background, and 35 selections are made for the new song A background. A random number for use is assigned, and 50 selection random numbers are assigned to the background of the new song B. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 50%, the new song A background is selected at a rate of 35%, and the second default background is selected at a rate of 15%.

  This new song B main table is used for one week from the start of the first song performance effect of the new song B until the start of the first song performance effect of the new song C before the transition to the all songs open state. When the initial performance performance of the new song B is performed, the background image of the new song B is most likely to appear at 50%, so that the player can enjoy the performance of the new song B even after the performance performance of the new song B is performed. In addition, before the transition to the state in which all songs are released, it is possible to further enjoy the performance performance of the new song B after the first time.

  The new song B main table is different from the new song A main table in that the new song B can be newly selected and the first default background is excluded. Here, if the first default background is not excluded, there are four types of backgrounds that can be selected: the first default background, the second default background, the new song A background, and the new song B background. The problem arises that the background selection rate cannot be set too high. Further, when trying to further increase the selection rate of the new song B background, there arises a problem that not only the default background but also the selection rate of the new song A background must be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the new song B is excluded by excluding the first default background included in the new song A main table (the selection rate is “0”) and lowering the selection rate of the second default background. While the background selection rate is increased, the selection rate of the new song A background is suppressed from being unnecessarily low.

  FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram of the new song C main table. As illustrated in FIG. 59, in the new song C main table, three types of new song A background, new song B background, and new song C background are defined as types of image data for generating a background image. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song C main table, 20 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and 30 selection random numbers are used for the new song B background. A random number is assigned, and 50 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 50%, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 30%, and the new song A background is selected at a rate of 20%.

  This new song C main table is used for one week from the start of the first song performance performance of the new song C to the start of the first song performance performance of the new song D before the transition to the all songs release state. When the first song performance performance of the new song C is performed, the background image of the new song C is most likely to appear at 50%. Therefore, the player can enjoy the performance of the new song C even after the performance performance of the new song C is performed. In addition, before the transition to the state in which all songs are released, it is possible to further enjoy the performance performance of the new song C after the first time.

  The new song C main table is different from the new song B main table in that the new song C is newly selectable and the second default background is excluded. That is, the second default background is excluded in order to set the appearance rate of the new song C background image to the highest and to set the appearance rates of the new song A and the new song B as high as possible. In other words, when the new song C main table is used, the normal effect data stored in the CGROM 148 is not used, and only the special effect data is used.

  FIG. 60 is a schematic diagram of the new song D main table. As illustrated in FIG. 60, the new song D main table defines four types of image data for generating a background image: new song A background, new song B background, new song C background, and new song D background. ing. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song D main table, 10 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and 20 selections are used for the new song B background. Random numbers are assigned, 30 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background, and 40 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song D background. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song D background is selected at a rate of 40%, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 30%, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 20%, and the remaining 10% rate. The new song A background is selected.

  The new song D main table is used for one week from when the first song performance effect of the new song D is started to when the first song performance effect of the new song E is started before shifting to the open state of all songs. When the first song performance production of the new song D is performed, the background image of the new song C is most likely to appear at 40%. Therefore, the player can enjoy the production of the new song D even after the song performance production of the new song D is performed. In addition, before the transition to the state in which all songs are released, it is possible to further enjoy the performance performance of the new song D after the first time.

  The new song D main table is different from the new song C main table in that the new song D can be newly selected. In addition, when comparing by the selection rate, the selection rate of the first default background and the second default background is set to 0% in both main tables, so that the appearance rate of the default background is lowered in the new song D main table. Instead of the method, the selection rate of the new song D is set to the highest value by lowering the selection rate of the previously performed new song (here, new songs A to C). The same applies to the tables after the new song E main table.

  FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram of the new song E main table. As illustrated in FIG. 61, in the new song E main table, 5 types of new song A background, new song B background, new song C background, new song D background, and new song E background are used as the types of image data for generating the background image. The type is specified. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song E main table, five selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and ten selection random numbers are used for the new song B background. Random numbers are assigned, 20 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background, 25 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song D background, and 40 selections are assigned to the new song E background. Random numbers are assigned. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song E background is selected at a rate of 40%, the new song D background is selected at a rate of 25%, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 20%, and the rate of 10%. The new song B background is selected and the remaining 5% of the new song A background is selected.

  FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram of the new song L main table. As illustrated in FIG. 62, in the new song L main table, twelve types of new song A background to new song L background are defined, and as with other main tables, the selection rate of the latest song is the highest. A random number for selection is assigned (20% in the example shown in FIG. 62). In this new song L main table, the background images of all new songs used for the performance of the music performance are defined, so until one week has passed since the first performance performance of the new song L was performed, the player Can enjoy the normal effects of all new songs, centering on the normal effects using the new song L.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a change in image data used for drawing a background image. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for describing changes in the appearance rate of various background images. In FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, “◎” indicates the background that is most likely to appear, “◯” indicates the background that may not appear to have the highest appearance rate, and “×” indicates the possibility that it may appear. There is no background.

  From the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced to the pachinko hall until one week elapses, a display list is created using the default table (see FIG. 56) described above for the normal performance. For this reason, the background image that appears in the normal performance until one week has passed since the introduction is the first default background or the second default background. In the second week of introduction, a display list is created using the above-described new song A main table (see FIG. 57). For this reason, in the normal production in the second week of introduction, the new song A background is most likely to appear, the second default background is likely to appear next, and the first default background is least likely to appear.

  In the third week of introduction, a display list is created using the new song B main table (see FIG. 58). For this reason, in the normal performance in the third week of introduction, the new song B background appears newly at the highest appearance rate, and the first default background does not appear. Also, in the fourth week after introduction, a display list is created using the new song C main table (see FIG. 59). For this reason, in the normal performance in the fourth week of introduction, the new song C background newly appears at the highest appearance rate, and the second default background also does not appear. Thereafter, every time one week elapses, a background image of a new new song is added and the number of types of background images finally becomes twelve. Therefore, variations of normal effects increase.

  Up to this point, the background image in the normal performance before the release of the entire song has been described. However, when the release of the entire song is performed, the type of the new song that is performed every hour based on the power-on is the performance of the song performance. It is changed every time it is performed (see FIG. 41). For this reason, the selection switching of the display list creation table was performed every week before the release of all songs, but the selection switching of the display list creation table is performed every hour when the release of all songs is performed. become.

  By the way, in the main table (for example, the new song L main table and the new song K main table) corresponding to the new song used for the last song performance production before all songs are released, the new song used for the initial song performance production. The appearance rate of the background image of the initial new song is extremely low (see, for example, FIGS. 57 and 62) compared to the main table corresponding to (new song A main table and table on the new song B side). For this reason, for example, during the first week after the performance of the first song performance of the new song L, the background images of the new song A and the new song B are very unlikely to appear, and some players cannot see these background images. It is also possible.

  On the other hand, in the all-music release state, the selection switching of the display list creation table is performed every hour. For this reason, for example, the new song A main table and the new song B main table are used. As a result, it is possible to enjoy a background image that has been limited to only one hour of the day, but has been less visible.

  By the way, as described above, when one variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol develops during the performance start standby effect in the performance before the performance start, the variation effect image is the main liquid crystal until the development timing. While the entire display screen of the display device 5 is displayed, the performance standby image P15 is displayed in a reduced size and superimposed on the varying effect image (see FIG. 7A-1). In addition, when the variation effect does not develop during the performance start standby effect, the performance standby image P15 is displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 at the timing when the next variation effect is started after the variation effect ends. The entire area is displayed (see FIG. 7A-3). In order to realize such control, the overall CPU 141 executes the following processing regarding the variation effect.

  That is, when the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2622 or determines that the variable effect start command has not been received (step S2612: NO), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the development time switching flag indicating whether or not to start the performance standby effect at the development timing is set to “ON” (step S2626). Here, when it is determined that the development time switching flag is set to “ON” (step S2626: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the development timing as in the process of step S2419 (see FIG. 45). (Step S2627).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the development (separation) timing (step S2627: YES), the general CPU 141 controls the setting information for displaying the special effect image that has been reduced and displayed over the entire area of the main liquid crystal display device 5. It is set in the RAM 145 (step S2628). A display list generated based on the setting information set in step S2628 is set in the display list storage area 1491.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2628, determines that the development time switching flag is not set to “ON” (step S2626: NO), or determines that it is not the development timing (step S2627). : NO), it is determined whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a change effect end command (step S2633). Here, when it is determined that the command is a variation effect end command (step S2633: YES), the variation effect being executed by the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24 is terminated (step S2634).

  By the way, if the after-end start flag indicating whether or not to start the performance start standby effect after the variation effect accompanying the variation display of this special symbol is set to “ON”, the variation of the special symbol this time It is necessary to start the performance start standby effect after the variable effect accompanying the display ends. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol determination is not suspended, the variation of the special symbol next to the variation display of the special symbol of this time is not immediately started. At the timing when the display is finished, a performance start standby effect is started over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 and at the same time, a variable effect image including a decorative pattern in a stopped display state is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6. I am going to do that. In order to realize such control, the overall CPU 141 executes the following processing regarding the variation effect.

  That is, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the after-start flag is set to “ON” following the process of step S2634 (step S2635). Here, when it is determined that the start flag after the end is set to “ON” (step S2635: YES), the first special symbol determination is suspended as in the process of step S2422 (see FIG. 45). It is determined whether or not there is (step S2636). Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is not suspended (step S2636: NO), setting information for displaying a variable effect image including a decorative symbol in a stopped state on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 Is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2637).

  When the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a variable effect end command when the process of step S2737 is executed (step S2633: NO), the after-start flag is set to “ON”. When it is determined that there is not (step S2635: NO), or when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is suspended (step S2636: YES), the following processing is executed regarding the winning effect relating to the long win game.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 53, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is an opening effect start command related to a long hit game (step S2640). Here, when it is determined that the command is an opening effect start command (step S2640: YES), is it in an unperformed state where the music performance effect has never been performed as in the process of step S2613 (see FIG. 51)? It is determined whether or not (step S2641). Here, when it is determined that the performance has not been performed (step S2641: YES), a default opening effect image is selected (step S2642), and conversely, when it is determined that the performance has not been performed (step S2641: NO). Then, an opening effect image based on the new song used for the last music performance effect is selected (step S2643).

Next, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for starting display of the opening effect image selected in step S2642 or step S2643 over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device in the control RAM 145 (step S2644).
Next, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not a special effect is being executed (step S2645), similarly to the process of step S2606 (see FIG. 52). If it is determined that the special effect is not being executed (step S2645: NO), the process proceeds to step S2649. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect is being executed (step S2645: YES), setting information for reducing the display of the special effect image is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2647).
As a result, as illustrated in the opening display of FIG. 50, the opening effect image is displayed on the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, and the special effect image (for example, the music performance effect image P48) is reduced and displayed. It will be displayed superimposed on the opening effect image.

Subsequently, when the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not an opening command (step S2640: NO), the command from the effect control board 130 is an in-round effect start command related to the long hit game. It is determined whether or not (step S2649).
The determination process in step S2649 may be replaced with “determine whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is an in-round effect end command (step S2649)”.
If it is determined that the command is an in-round effect start command (step S2649: YES), it is determined whether or not a special effect is being executed (step S2649-1) in the same manner as in step S2645. If it is determined that the special effect is not being executed (step S2649-1: NO), setting information for displaying the effect image during the round according to the number of rounds is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2650). .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special effect is being executed (step S2649-1: YES), it is determined whether the number of rounds indicated by the round effect start command is 4 to 8 (step S2649-3). ). When it is determined that the number of rounds is 4 to 8 (step S2649-3: YES), setting information for reducing the display of the special effect image is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2649-4).
Thereby, as illustrated in the R4 display to R8 display of FIG. 50, the challenge chance game effect image that is the game effect image, the time-determined (or non-time-determined) image, and the time-delay entry image are displayed in the main liquid crystal display device 5 And a special effect image (for example, a music performance effect image P48) is reduced and displayed in a superimposed manner on these game effect images.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2649-4, step S2649-5, or step S2650 when it is determined that the command from the effect control board 130 is not an effect start command during round (step S2649: NO). In this case, it is determined whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a music selection screen display command (step S2651). If it is determined that the command is a music selection screen display command (step S2651: YES), the latest music is specified (step S2652). For example, if the new song information indicating the new song used for the performance of the music is stored in the control RAM 145 and the new song information is updated every time the performance of the music is performed, it is used for the previous performance of the music. It is possible to specify a new song (latest song) that has been made.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2652, the overall CPU 141 displays setting information for displaying a music selection screen for selecting all new songs that have already been performed including the latest music specified in the process of step S2652. (Step S2653).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a music selection screen display command (step S2651: NO), or if the process of step S2653 is executed, the command music playback command from the effect control board 130 It is determined whether or not (step S2654). If it is determined that the command is a music playback command (step S2654: YES), setting information for starting the music of the selected new music is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2655). It should be noted that which music is selected is specified based on an operation command that is set in the sub-RAM 133 in the process of step S12 (see FIG. 30) and is transmitted from the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S13. Is possible.

  When the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a music reproduction command (step S2654: NO), or when the process of step S2655 is executed, as shown in FIG. 55, the effect control board It is determined whether or not the command from 130 is an ending effect start command related to the long hit game (step S2658). If it is determined that the command is an ending effect start command (step S2658: YES), the display of the ending effect image based on the same new song used for the opening effect on the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is started. Setting information is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2659).

Next, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the special effect is being executed (step S2659-1) in the same manner as the process of step S2649-1. If it is determined that the special effect is not being executed (step S2659-1: NO), the process proceeds to step S2660.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the special effect is being executed (step S2659-1: YES), the setting information for reducing the display of the special effect image is not set in the control RAM 145 (step S2659-3).
Thereby, as exemplified in the ending display of FIG. 50, the ending effect image as the game effect image is displayed over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5.
If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not the ending effect start command (step S2658: NO), or if the process of step S2659-1 or step S2659-3 is executed, the short hit game The following processing is executed with respect to the hit effect related to.

  That is, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a short hit effect start command (step S2660). Here, when it is determined that the command is a short hit effect start command (step S2660: YES), it is determined whether or not the performance is not performed (step S2661), similarly to the process of step S2613. If it is determined that the performance has not been performed (step S2661: YES), a default short win effect image is selected (step S2662). On the other hand, when it is determined that the performance is not in the unperformed state (step S2661: NO), the short hit effect image based on the new song used for the last music performance effect is selected (step S2663).

  When executing the process of step S2662, or when executing the process of step S2663, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not a special effect is being executed (step S2664) as in the process of step S2606. If it is determined that the special effect is not being executed (step S2664: NO), the short hit effect image selected in step S2662 or step S2663 is displayed over the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5. Setting information for starting display is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2666). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect is being executed (step S2664: YES), setting information for starting the reduced display of the short hit effect image selected in the process of step S2662 or the process of step S2663 is the control RAM 145. (Step S2667).

  Next, the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a short hit effect start command (step S2660: NO), executes the process of step S2666, or executes the process of step S2667. In this case, it is determined whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a short hit effect end command (step S2668). Here, if it is determined that the command is a short hit effect end command (step S2668: YES), the short hit effect being executed is ended (step S2669). When the process of step S2669 is performed, or when it is determined that the command from the effect control board 130 is not the short hit effect end command (step S2668: NO), the process is performed in the music performance effect end process of step S2700. It is advanced.

  Although not shown in the detailed flowchart of the normal effect control process of FIGS. 51 to 55, the unauthorized prize display 1 command or the unauthorized prize display 2 command transmitted by the command transmission process by the sub CPU 131 described above, or When the overall CPU 141 receives either the illegal prize display 3 command or the illegal prize display 4 command, if it is an illegal prize display 1 command, setting information for starting the first start port error display is set. If it is an illegal prize display 2 command, setting information for starting the second start opening error display is set, and if it is an illegal prize display 3 command, setting information for starting the specific prize opening error display is set, If it is an illegal prize display 4 command, setting information for starting the big prize opening error display is set.

[Ending processing of musical performance performance by image sound control board 140]
FIG. 65 is a detailed flowchart of the music performance effect end processing in step S2700 of FIG. Following the normal performance control processing in step S2600, the overall CPU 141, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 65, determines whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the music performance performance has reached the time required for the music performance performance. Based on, it is determined whether or not the music performance effect has ended (step S2701). If it is determined that the music performance performance has not ended (step S2701: NO), the process proceeds to the image output control process of step S2800.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance effect has ended (step S2701: YES), whether or not the post-performance effect (next performance announcement effect, DJ effect) executed following the music performance effect has ended. Is determined (step S2702). Here, when it is determined that the performance is finished after the performance is finished (step S2702: YES), for example, based on whether or not the variable production start command is received after receiving the customer waiting production start command from the production control board 130. It is then determined whether the customer is waiting (step S2703). If it is determined that the customer is waiting (step S2703: YES), setting information for returning to the normal screen mode is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2704).

  On the other hand, if the general CPU 141 determines that it is not in the customer waiting state (step S2703: NO), for example, based on the reception status of the command related to the special game from the effect control board 130, whether or not the long hit game is in progress Is determined (step S2705). If it is determined that the game is not long hit (step S2705: NO), it is determined whether or not a start command (for example, a variable effect start command) has been received (step S2706). If it is determined that the start command has not been received (step S2706: NO), the process proceeds to the image output control process in step S2800.

  When determining that the start command has been received (step S2706: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for returning to the normal screen mode in the control RAM 145 (step S2707).

  That is, when the music performance effect is finished and the customer is waiting, the process of step S2704 is performed and immediately returned to the normal screen mode, and when the music performance effect is finished, the customer is not waiting and the special game. If not, for example, the screen is returned to the normal screen mode at the timing when the variation effect is started in response to reception of the variation effect start command.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2707, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the replay flag related to music reproduction is set to “ON” (step S2708). If it is determined that the replay flag is not set to “ON” (step S2708: NO), the process proceeds to the image output control process in step S2800.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the replay flag is set to “ON” (step S2708: YES), the overall CPU 141 controls setting information for starting playback of a new song indicated by the song information stored in the control RAM 145. The RAM 145 is set (step S2709). As a result, a new song that has not been played to the end due to an interruption of the performance before the performance start or the performance of the performance of the music or the performance after the end of the performance despite the selection by the player during the long hit game will be played from the beginning. . Then, following the processing of step S2709, the overall CPU 141 sets the replay flag to “OFF” (step S2710).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that a long game is being played (step S2705: YES), based on whether or not an effect start command during the final round is received from the effect control board 130, the start of the last round It is determined whether or not (step S2711). If it is determined that it is before the start of the final round (step S2711: YES), the process proceeds to step S2706. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2707 at the timing when the in-round production start command is received as the start command.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not before the final round (step S2711: NO), for example, whether or not the ending effect has ended based on the elapsed time since the reception of the ending effect start command. Is determined (step S2712). If it is determined that the ending effect has not ended (step S2712: NO), the process proceeds to the image output control process in step S2800. Conversely, if it is determined that the ending effect has ended (step S2712: YES), the process proceeds to step S2707.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, when the music performance effect is finished, the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 perform the music performance effect using the new music (unperformed music) to be performed next. The next performance announcement will be made in advance of what will be done. For example, when the performance performance of the new song A is finished, the next performance announcement performance for the new song B, which is the next unperformed performance, is performed. For example, when the performance performance of the new song F is finished, the next song related to the new song G to be performed next is performed. Perform a notice effect. In order to execute such a next performance announcement effect, when the music performance effect end process is completed, the following process is performed.

  That is, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance effect end processing has not been completed (step S2702: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether there is an unperformed song (step S2714). Specifically, with reference to the performance management table (see FIG. 38), it is determined whether or not there is a new song whose first music performance effect date is later than the new song used for the music performance effect performed this time.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that there is an unperformed song (step S2714: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the next performance announcement effect has been completed (step S2715). If it is determined that the next performance announcement effect has not been completed (step S2715: NO), setting information for executing the next performance notification effect is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2716). Specifically, the first song performance stage date of each unperformed song is compared, and the new song whose earliest song performance stage date is the first is identified as the new song to be performed next, for example, the title of the identified new song, Setting information for displaying on the main liquid crystal display device 5 an effect image including the number of days remaining until the first music performance effect of the new song is performed is set in the control RAM 145. The title of the new song and the remaining number of days can be determined based on the information stored in the performance management table and the RTC information.

On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that there are no unperformed songs (that is, all songs are open) (step S2714: NO), the next performance announcement effect related to the song to be performed at the next (1 hour later) song performance effect. Is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2717).
When the process of step S2716 or the process of step S2717 ends, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for executing a DJ effect corresponding to the current music performance effect in the control RAM 145.
When the process of step S2718 ends, the process proceeds to the image output control process of step S2800.

[Image Output Control Processing by Image Acoustic Control Board 140]
FIG. 66 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step S2800 of FIG. Subsequent to the music performance presentation end process in step S2700, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not setting information regarding the main liquid crystal is stored in the control RAM 145 (step S2801). In the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device 5 is used to perform a normal effect (a variation effect or a win effect that is a game-related effect), a pre-performance start effect, a music performance effect, a post-performance effect and a music playback effect, and an error display. Therefore, in this step S2801, the setting information for executing the normal performance, the setting information for executing the music performance effect, the setting information for starting the music reproduction, and the performance announcement effect by the sub liquid crystal display device 6 are executed. It is determined whether or not at least one of setting information for executing a game-related effect during execution of a special effect (variation effect or winning effect) is stored.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the setting information related to the main liquid crystal is stored (step S2801: YES), the lowermost first layer defined in the stored setting information and the priority management table described above. To determine which image is preferentially displayed based on the priority of each of the uppermost 8th layers, and which output control pattern among the output control patterns 1 to 3 is used to execute image output control Then, it is determined what screen configuration should be constructed, and a display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the determination result (step S2802). The created display list is set in the display list storage area 1491 (step S2803).

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2803 or determines that the setting information regarding the main liquid crystal is not stored (step S2801: NO), the setting information regarding the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is stored in the control RAM 145. It is determined whether or not (step S2804). In this embodiment, since the performance announcement effect related to the performance announcement and the game related effect during the special effect are performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6, setting information for executing the notification effect is stored in this step S2804. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is determined that the setting information related to the sub liquid crystal is stored (step S2804: YES), the overall CPU 141 creates a display list for the sub liquid crystal (step S2805), and the created display list is stored in the display list storage area 1491. It is set (step S2806). When the process of step S2806 is executed, or when it is determined that the setting information regarding the sub liquid crystal is not stored (step S2804: NO), the process proceeds to the audio output control process of step S2900.

[Audio output control processing by the image acoustic control board 140]
FIG. 67 is a detailed flowchart of the audio output control process in step S2900 of FIG. Subsequent to the image output control process in step S2800, the overall CPU 141 synchronizes the sound output from the speaker 24 with various effects executed by the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 in accordance with the image output control process. Therefore, the following processing is executed.

That is, for example, based on whether or not the main liquid crystal display list including the change effect start instruction is set in the display list storage area 1491 in the process of step S2803, the overall CPU 141 determines the change effect image related to the change effect. It is determined whether display has been started (step S2901).
Note that in the determination in step S2901, a determination is made as to which audio is to be preferentially output based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer specified in the priority management table. Is done. Also, the output volume corresponding to each sound is set with the current volume setting value as the basic volume value.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the display of the variation effect image is started (step S2901: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the variation effect image is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (step S2902). . Here, when it is determined that it is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (step S2902: NO), that is, when display of the variable effect image is started on the main liquid crystal display device 5, it is synchronized with the variable effect image display. Set the output volume corresponding to the sound of each image display (reach effect display, etc.) constituting each change effect image display, using the current sound volume setting value as the basic sound volume value and setting the sound related to the change effect image. The sound DSP 143 is started to output the sound with the output volume (step S2903). On the other hand, when it is determined that the display is to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (step S2902: YES), priority is given to the audio output related to the performance notification effect or the music performance effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5. Then, the process proceeds to step S2904, which will be described later, without performing the process of step S2903.

The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2903, determines that the display of the variable effect image is not started (step S2901: NO), or displays the variable effect image on the sub liquid crystal display device 6. If it is determined that there is (step S2902: YES), it is determined whether or not to start displaying the variable effect image by the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (step S2904). For example, when the display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the setting information for displaying the special effect image set in the control RAM 145 on the full screen by the process of step S2628 (see FIG. 52), the sub liquid crystal It is determined that the change effect image display by the display device 6 is started.
In the determination in step S2904, a determination is made as to which audio is to be preferentially output based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer specified in the priority management table. Is done.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that display of the variation effect image on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is to be started (step S2904: YES), for example, setting information regarding the variation effect image of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 set in the control RAM 145. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the variation effect is an effect greater than reach (step S2905). And when it determines with it being more than reach (step S2905: YES), ie, when the expectation degree which becomes a big hit is relatively high, the process which lowers | hangs the audio | voice regarding a fluctuation effect image and continues the audio | voice output of a fluctuation effect is carried out. (Step S2906). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not reach or more (step S2905: NO), that is, when the expectation level that is a big hit is relatively low, or when the necessity for audio output is low, the audio DSP 143 outputs audio regarding the fluctuation effect image. Is stopped (step S2907).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines not to start display of the fluctuating effect by the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (step S2904: NO), if the process of step S2906 is executed, or if the process of step S2907 is executed, for example, the above step In the process of S2803, the display list for the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the display list for the sub liquid crystal display device 6 including display start instructions for performance images before performance start (performance standby image P15, performance music image P16, etc.) is stored in the display list. Based on whether or not the area 1491 is set, it is determined whether or not display of the pre-performance start effect image related to the pre-performance start effect of the special effects has been started (step S2908). Here, when it is determined that the display of the performance image before the performance start is started (step S2908: YES), the audio DSP 143 is started to output the sound related to the performance image before the performance start in synchronization with the display of the performance image before the performance start ( Step S2909).

  As described above, the performance before the performance start is composed of the moderator effect, the performance start standby effect, and the countdown effect. Since the moderator effect is only a voice effect, the game-related effect image in the normal effect mode is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 during execution of the host effect. Audio output related to the performance is started by the acoustic DSP 143. For the audio output related to the moderator effect, the current volume setting value is set as the basic volume value, and the output volume corresponding to the sound of the moderator effect to be executed this time is set. Done.

  Then, by performing the performance start standby effect following the moderator effect, the display of the performance start standby effect image P15 related to this performance start standby effect is started by the main liquid crystal display device 5 (S2908: YES) and the sub liquid crystal When the display of the variation effect image P22 and the like is started on the display device 6, the sound DSP 143 starts to output sound related to the performance standby image P15 in synchronization with the display of the performance standby image P15. The sound output related to the performance start standby effect is set according to the set output volume by setting the output volume corresponding to the sound of the performance standby image P15 of the performance start standby effect to be executed this time, using the current volume setting value as the basic volume value. The sound output of the moderator effect is performed by the acoustic DSP 143.

In addition, when the countdown effect is executed subsequent to the performance start standby effect, the display of the performance song name image P16 related to the countdown effect is started by the main liquid crystal display device 5 (S2908: YES), and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is displayed. When the display of the countdown image P25 is started, audio output regarding the countdown image P25 is started by the acoustic DSP 143 in synchronization with the display of the countdown image P25. The sound output related to the countdown effect is performed by setting the output volume corresponding to the sound of the countdown effect image P25 of the countdown effect to be executed, using the current sound volume setting value as the basic sound volume value, and outputting the sound of the countdown effect with the set output volume Is performed by the acoustic DSP 143.
In the case of waiting for a customer as described above, when the performance before the performance start is started, the current volume setting value is kept until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after waiting for the customer. The sound of the performance before the performance start is output with the output volume with the basic volume value as the output volume, and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the customer was waiting, the output volume for the current volume setting value is up to 40% The performance sound before the performance starts is output at the reduced output volume.
For example, if the start time of the performance before the performance starts 10 seconds after waiting for the customer, the sound of the performance before the performance starts at the output volume with the current volume setting value as the basic volume value for 20 seconds. Is output, and after 20 seconds, the sound of the performance before the performance start is output at an output volume obtained by reducing the output volume with respect to the current volume setting value to 40%.
In the determination in step S2908, a determination is made as to which audio is to be preferentially output based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer, which is defined in the priority management table. Is done.

When determining that the display of the performance image before the performance start is not started (step S2908: NO), or when the processing of step S2909 is executed, the overall CPU 141 instructs the display of the music performance performance image, for example, in the processing of step S2803. Whether the display of the music performance effect image P48 related to the music performance effect is started based on whether the display list for the main liquid crystal display including the display list or the display list for the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is set in the display list storage area 1491 It is determined whether or not (step S2910). Here, when it is determined that the display of the music performance effect image P48 is started (step S2910: YES), the audio DSP 143 starts audio output related to the music performance effect image P48 in synchronization with the display of the music performance effect image P48 (step S2910). S2911).
The audio output related to the music performance effect is set with the current volume setting value as the basic volume value, and the output volume corresponding to the audio of the music performance effect image P48 of the music performance effect to be executed this time is set. A sound output of the performance performance is performed by the acoustic DSP 143.
In the determination in step S2910, a determination is made as to which audio is to be preferentially output based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer specified in the priority management table. Is done.

  When determining that the display of the music performance effect image is not started (step S2910: NO) or when the process of step S2911 is executed, the general CPU 141 performs the effect image after starting the performance in the process of step S2803 (next performance notification). Based on whether the display list for the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the display list for the sub liquid crystal display device 6 including the display start instruction of the image P17, the DJ image P26, etc. is set in the display list storage area 1491. It is determined whether or not the display of the post-performance effect image related to the post-end performance has been started (step S2912). Here, when it is determined that the display of the effect image after the performance has ended (step S2912: YES), the audio DSP 143 starts audio output related to the effect image after the performance in synchronization with the display of the effect image after the performance ends ( Step S2913).

As described above, the performance after the performance ends is composed of the next performance announcement performance and the DJ performance. When the next performance announcement effect is executed, display of the next performance notification image P17 related to the next performance announcement effect is started by the main liquid crystal display device 5 (S2912: YES), and the variable effect image is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6. When the display of P22 and the like is started, the sound DSP 143 starts to output the sound related to the next performance notification image P17 in synchronization with the display of the next performance notification image P17.
For the audio output related to the next performance announcement effect, the output volume corresponding to the sound of the next performance announcement image P17 of the next performance announcement effect to be executed this time is set using the current volume setting value as the basic volume value, and the set output volume is set. The sound DSP 143 outputs a sound for the next performance announcement.

Then, when the DJ performance is executed following the next performance announcement effect, the display of the DJ image P26 related to this DJ performance is started by the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (S2912: YES), and at the main liquid crystal display device 5 When the display of the fluctuation effect image P15 is started, the sound DSP 143 starts to output the sound related to the DJ image P26 in synchronization with the display of the DJ image P26.
The sound output related to the DJ effect is set as the basic volume value with the current sound volume setting value, and the output sound volume corresponding to the sound of the DJ image P22 of the DJ effect that is executed this time is set, and the sound output of the DJ effect with the set output sound volume is set. Is performed by the acoustic DSP 143.
Note that in the determination in step S2912, determination is made as to which audio is to be preferentially output based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer specified in the priority management table. Is done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined not to start the display of the music performance effect image P48 (step S2910: NO), or when the process of step S2911 is executed, the process is performed in the data transmission control process (see FIG. 36) of step S3000. It is advanced.

  Here, the audio priority output processing based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer defined in the priority management table will be described. As an audio output control process executed based on the priority management table, there are audio output control patterns shown below. This process corresponds to priority determination means.

First, when the time for outputting the sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to one layer and the sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, priority is given to these layers. A sound output control pattern 1 that performs output control only for sounds related to effects (or displays) belonging to the highest level (including sounds related to effects (or displays) belonging to the lower priority layers).
This audio output control pattern 1 is adopted when one layer is the seventh layer or the eighth layer, or when one layer is the fourth layer and the other layer is the third layer. And the audio output ratio with other layers is 10: 0. In addition, since the sound in the case of outputting the jackpot definite sound in the variation effect of the third layer belongs to the seventh layer, the priority of the sound output becomes high when outputting the jackpot definite sound.

Next, in the case where the time to output the sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to one layer and the sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, The sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to the layer with the highest priority is output so that it can be heard by the player (in some cases, the game hall staff), and the effect belonging to a layer other than the layer with the highest priority (or Output control pattern 2 for controlling the output of the voice related to (display) more difficult to hear than the highest priority layer.
In this audio output control pattern 2, when one layer is the sixth layer and the other layer is the fourth layer, or when one layer is the fifth layer and the other layer is the fourth layer The audio output ratio between one layer and another layer is 7: 3.

[Light emission control processing by CPU of lamp control board 150]

Although the light emission control process in the CPU of the lamp control board 150 is not shown, the light emission control process in the CPU of the lamp control board 150 is synchronized with the sound output from the speaker 24 by the sound output control process controlled by the overall CPU 141. Therefore, it is necessary to perform light emission control.
Therefore, the light emission control processing in the CPU of the lamp control board 150 is replaced with “light emission output” in step S2903, S2906, S2909, S2911 in the detailed flowchart similar to the audio output control processing in FIG. 67, and step S2906. In step S2907, “sound output is stopped” is replaced with “stop light emission output”, and “stop sound output” in step S2907 is replaced with “stop light emission output”. be able to.

Here, priority output processing of light emission in various light emitting elements based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer defined in the priority management table will be described. This process corresponds to priority determination means.
As the light emission output control process executed based on the priority management table, the light emission output of various light emitting elements related to the effect (or display) belonging to one layer and the effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers. In the case where the light emission output timings of the various light emitting elements are overlapped, only the light emitting elements related to the rendering (or display) of the layer having the highest priority among these layers are subjected to the light emission output control.
However, when the light emitting element related to the effect (or display) of the layer with the lower priority does not overlap with the light emitting element related to the effect (or display) of the layer with the highest priority, the effect ( Alternatively, the light emission output control processing of the light emitting element according to (display) is also executed.

Among the operation control processes in the CPU of the lamp control board 150, the fluctuation effects accompanying the special symbol fluctuation display are based on the game information (various commands) transmitted from the game control board 100 as described above. Since the contents and the start / end timing are set in the effect control board 130, the CPU of the lamp control board 150 determines that the upper movable device 8a or the CPU of the lamp control board 150 is based on the change effect start command instructing the start of the change effect of the effect pattern selected by the sub CPU 131. Then, the operation control process of the lower movable device 8b is executed.
Further, in various special effects executed in the special effect mode, when performing the operation control process for operating the lower movable device 8b, the CPU performs the operation control process in synchronization with the light emission control process. The lower movable device 8b can be operated during each special performance to be executed.

[Operational effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device 5, the sub liquid crystal display device 6, and the speaker 24 that cannot be used for other effects because they are normally used for normal effects, The performance performance of the music irrelevant to the timing at which the production control board 130 receives various commands (game information) from the game control board 100 and the information indicated by these commands is executed. Therefore, an effect with a high degree of freedom can be executed without being greatly restricted by the game control board 100 that controls the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device 5 is used for the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol in the normal effect mode, and the special effect mode (the performance start standby effect, the music performance effect, and the next performance announcement effect are being executed). ), Since the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is used for the variation effect, the special effect can be performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 without being affected by the variation display of the special symbol. There is an advantage that the interest of special production is not impaired.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the island power supply device 500 with a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on the same island in the pachinko hall with the individual power switch provided in each pachinko gaming machine 1 set to “ON”. By turning on the power supply (see FIG. 5), it is possible to simultaneously activate the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1. For this reason, as described in this embodiment, the time condition based on the elapsed time from power-on (whether or not 1 hour has passed in this embodiment) is set to be the same for a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1. As a result, it is possible to start a special effect simultaneously on a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, since a music performance effect is performed in which a new song is performed as an unperformed content, a more interesting performance is performed compared to a case where a special effect is performed using known content. Is possible.

[Modified example of display list creation table]
FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram of the all-mode table. In the above embodiment, when the first song performance performance of the new song is performed, the special selection for switching the display list creation table to be used is also performed in the state where all songs are released in order to newly appear the performance based on the new song in the normal performance. The case of executing was described. On the other hand, as another embodiment, the display list is created using the all mode table in which the selection ratios of the production patterns of all new songs are set equal as shown in FIG. It may be. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the normal production based on each new song appear in a balanced manner.

[Other variations]
In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine that is a pachinko game machine has been described as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other game machines include a rotary machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, A ball ball game machine or the like may be used, and these game machines may be equipped with a payout device for paying out a medium such as a ball or a medal, but not so (for example, a so-called enclosed type). Also good.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the start timing of a music performance production | presentation was controlled based on the elapsed time on the basis of the time of power-on of the pachinko game machine 1, it replaced with this, for example, a customer waiting state is cancelled | released Based on the elapsed time since the game was started (the time the player is playing), the start timing of the performance of the music performance is controlled, or the game history such as the total number of times and the number of times the special game has been played The start timing of the performance before the performance start and the performance performance of the music performance may be controlled based on the above.

  In the above embodiment, the volume switch 135 is provided on the effect control board 130, the sub CPU 131 checks the value of the volume switch 135, and the sub CPU 131 executes the above-described initial volume setting process. However, the volume switch 135 may be provided on the image sound control board 140, the central CPU 141 may check the value of the volume switch 135, and the central CPU 141 may execute the above-described volume initial value setting process.

  In the above embodiment, the case where it is determined whether to start the performance before the performance start or the music performance performance based on the elapsed time since the power is turned on has been described, but the performance before the performance start or the music performance performance is started. Whether or not to do so may be determined by other methods. For example, the set time is stored in the control ROM 144, it is determined whether or not the current time measured by the RTC 134 has reached the set time, and when it is determined that the set time has been reached, the music performance effect is started. Also good. According to this configuration, by setting the same set time for a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1, if there is no deviation in the current time measured by each RTC 134 of each pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines Regardless of whether or not the machine 1 is installed on the same island, it is possible to simultaneously start the performance of the music performance on a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the special performance is a music performance performance that performs a new song as an unperformed content has been described, but the special performance is an effect that announces an unperformed content (for example, a character) other than the new song. It may be an effect using known content.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example. However, the present invention is also applicable to, for example, a single-type pachinko gaming machine. is there.

  In addition, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the screen diagrams and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be screens of other display modes.

  As another embodiment, the effect control board 130 may execute part of the processing executed in the image sound control board 140. Further, the effect control board 130 and the image sound control board 140 are integrally configured so that the process executed on the effect control board 130 and the process executed on the image sound control board 150 are executed by one control board. May be.

  Further, in a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a so-called probability variation function, the “challenge chance” that is the promotion effect described above may be executed as a promotion effect indicating whether or not the probability variation occurs.

In addition, after the special effect mode is finished, the mode is changed to the normal effect mode. However, the jackpot finalizing effect is performed for a predetermined period after the transition to the normal effect mode (for example, until 20 times of changing effects are executed or 3 minutes). Has a higher probability than usual (for example, 10 times easier to select than usual). Therefore, since the jackpot finalizing effect is easily selected during this predetermined period, if the variable effect executed during this predetermined period is a variable effect that results in a jackpot, the player often sees it as normal. A jackpot finalizing effect that cannot be seen can be seen in this predetermined period. Further, in the predetermined period after the transition to the normal effect mode, a variable effect peculiar to the predetermined period different from the variable effect executed in the normal effect mode other than the predetermined period may be executed.
By doing in this way, gameability can be improved.

  The special effect executing means may execute an effect including unperformed content as the special effect.

1 Pachinko machine (an example of a game machine)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 4 Display 5 Main liquid crystal display device 6 Sub liquid crystal display device 10 Game area 11 1st starting opening 12 2nd starting opening 13 Large winning opening 16 Gate 17 Electric tulip 19 Specific winning opening 24 Speaker 41 First special symbol display 42 Second 2 Special symbol display 100 Game control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
130 Production control board 131 Sub CPU
132 Sub ROM
133 Sub RAM
134 RTC
140 Image Sound Control Board 141 General CPU
142 VDP
143 Acoustic DSP
144 ROM for control
145 RAM for control
146 ROM for sound
147 SDRAM
148 CGROM
149 VRAM
150 Lamp control board 1491 Display list storage area 1492 Development storage area 1493 Full screen frame buffer 1494 Reduced image frame buffer 1495 Main liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 Sub liquid crystal frame buffer

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that performs a variable display according to the establishment of the start condition, and a special display result is derived as a result of the variable display, and in a special gaming state advantageous to the player,
Effect control means for executing a game effect including at least a special effect executed when a predetermined start time is reached,
The production control means includes
Even during the execution of the special effect, the variable effect can be executed,
Including sound control means for outputting a sound related to each of the game effects at a set volume;
The sound control means is
During the execution of the special effect, the first sound control for outputting the sound related to the special effect at a set volume is executed,
If the variation effect is not started for a predetermined time after the variation effect is finished during the execution of the special effect, the second sound control is executed to output the sound related to the special effect at a volume reduced from the set volume. ,
Executing the first sound control in response to the start of the variation effect during the execution of the second sound control;
A gaming machine characterized by that.